Concept Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsNetworking S3100 Series

Dell EMC Conguration Guide for the S3100

Series

9.14.1.5

Summary of content (1148 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell EMC Configuration Guide for the S3100 Series 9.14.1.
PAGE 2
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
PAGE 3
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................35 Audience........................................................................................................................................................................... 35 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
Upgrading Dell EMC Networking OS............................................................................................................................. 61 Verify Software Images Before Installation....................................................................................................................61 Using HTTP for File Transfers........................................................................................................................................ 62 4 Management.........
PAGE 5
Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode................................................................................................................... 87 Using Telnet to get to Another Network Device.......................................................................................................... 87 Lock CONFIGURATION Mode.......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 6
Continue Clause........................................................................................................................................................ 121 IP Fragment Handling..................................................................................................................................................... 121 IP Fragments ACL Examples....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 7
Configure BFD for IS-IS...........................................................................................................................................163 Configure BFD for BGP........................................................................................................................................... 165 Configure BFD for VRRP.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
Enabling or disabling BGP neighbors..................................................................................................................... 237 Route Map Continue............................................................................................................................................... 238 Configuring BGP Confederations..........................................................................................................................
PAGE 9
Using DHCP Clear Commands...............................................................................................................................276 Configure the System to be a Relay Agent.................................................................................................................276 Configure the System to be a DHCP Client............................................................................................................... 278 Configuring the DHCP Client System.........
PAGE 10
Protocol Overview.........................................................................................................................................................304 Ring Status............................................................................................................................................................... 305 Multiple FRRP Rings...............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 11
IGMP Protocol Overview..............................................................................................................................................325 IGMP Version 2........................................................................................................................................................ 325 IGMP Version 3........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 12
Overview of Layer Modes...................................................................................................................................... 358 Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode..................................................................................................................358 Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode.................................................................................................................. 359 Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode.......
PAGE 13
Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control........................................................................................................ 383 Enabling Pause Frames........................................................................................................................................... 383 Configure the MTU Size on an Interface....................................................................................................................384 Port-Pipes..........................
PAGE 14
Enabling ICMP Unreachable Messages...................................................................................................................... 407 ICMP Redirects.............................................................................................................................................................. 407 UDP Helper.....................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
Monitoring IPv6 RA Guard......................................................................................................................................433 23 iSCSI Optimization...................................................................................................................................434 iSCSI Optimization Overview.......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 16
Configuring LACP Commands............................................................................................................................... 467 LACP Configuration Tasks............................................................................................................................................ 468 Creating a LAG.........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 17
Related Configuration Tasks...................................................................................................................................502 Important Points to Remember............................................................................................................................. 502 LLDP Compatibility..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 18
Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer...................................................................................................533 Preventing MSDP from Caching a Local Source.......................................................................................................533 Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source.................................................................................................. 534 Preventing MSDP from Advertising a Local Source..................
PAGE 19
Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change....................................................................................................... 558 MSTP Sample Configurations......................................................................................................................................559 Router 1 Running-ConfigurationRouter 2 Running-ConfigurationRouter 3 RunningConfigurationSFTOS Example Running-Configuration.........................................................................
PAGE 20
Tracking a Layer 2 Interface................................................................................................................................... 592 Tracking a Layer 3 Interface................................................................................................................................... 593 Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 21
Create a Redirect List..............................................................................................................................................642 Create a Rule for a Redirect-list.............................................................................................................................642 Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group..............................................................................644 Sample Configuration....................
PAGE 22
Restore Power Delivery on a Port................................................................................................................................670 Display the Power Details..............................................................................................................................................670 40 Port Monitoring........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 23
PVST+ Sample Configurations..................................................................................................................................... 707 43 Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................................... 710 Implementation Information...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 24
Configuration Task List............................................................................................................................................ 744 RIP Configuration Example.....................................................................................................................................750 45 Remote Monitoring (RMON)................................................................................................................... 756 Implementation Information.........
PAGE 25
TACACS+........................................................................................................................................................................808 Configuration Task List for TACACS+................................................................................................................... 808 TACACS+ Remote Authentication......................................................................................................................... 810 Command Authorization..
PAGE 26
VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks........................................................................................................... 843 VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence...................................................................................................................847 Enabling Drop Eligibility........................................................................................................................................... 847 Honoring the Incoming DEI Value.......
PAGE 27
Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps.............................................................................................................................. 869 Enabling an SNMP Agent to Notify Syslog Server Failure........................................................................................ 871 Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP........................................................................................................................872 Copying a Configuration File................
PAGE 28
MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions....................................................................... 898 Monitoring BGP sessions via SNMP........................................................................................................................... 898 Monitor Port-Channels.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 29
Configure Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................................................. 936 Related Configuration Tasks...................................................................................................................................936 Important Points to Remember...................................................................................................................................
PAGE 30
Configuring a Custom-defined Period for NTP time Synchronization..............................................................966 57 Tunneling................................................................................................................................................. 967 Configuring a Tunnel......................................................................................................................................................967 Configuring Tunnel Keepalive Settings.........
PAGE 31
VLT Bandwidth Monitoring................................................................................................................................... 1000 VLT and Stacking................................................................................................................................................... 1000 VLT and IGMP Snooping.......................................................................................................................................1000 VLT IPv6.............
PAGE 32
Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain...........................................................................1051 Configure BFD in VLT Domain.................................................................................................................................... 1054 Sample BFD configuration in VLT domain...........................................................................................................1054 62 VLT Proxy Gateway........................................
PAGE 33
Sample Configurations................................................................................................................................................. 1100 VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration........................................................................................................................... 1100 VRRP in a VRF Configuration................................................................................................................................
PAGE 34
Certificate signing requests (CSR)....................................................................................................................... 1140 How certificates are requested............................................................................................................................. 1140 Advantages of X.509v3 certificates...................................................................................................................... 1141 X.509v3 support in ...............
PAGE 35
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S3100 series consists of S3124, S3124F, S3148, S3124P, S3148P platforms. The S3124, S3124F, S3124P, S3148P platforms are available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.8(2.0) and later.
PAGE 36
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
PAGE 37
For more information about privilege levels and security options, refer to the Privilege Levels Overview section in the Security chapter. The Dell EMC Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information.
PAGE 38
PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
PAGE 39
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command Interface Group DellEMC(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range DellEMC(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface DellEMC(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface DellEMC(conf-if-ma-1/1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Null Interface DellEMC(conf-if-nu-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Port-channel Interface DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Tunnel Interface DellEM
PAGE 40
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command SPANNING TREE DellEMC(config-span)# protocol spanning-tree 0 TRACE-LIST DellEMC(conf-trace-acl)# ip trace-list CLASS-MAP DellEMC(config-class-map)# class-map CONTROL-PLANE DellEMC(conf-control-cpuqos)# control-plane-cpuqos DHCP DellEMC(config-dhcp)# ip dhcp server DHCP POOL DellEMC(config-dhcp-pool-name)# pool (DHCP Mode) ECMP DellEMC(conf-ecmp-group-ecmpgroup-id)# ecmp-group EIS DellEMC(conf-mgmt-eis)# management egress-interfaceselection FRR
PAGE 41
The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode (CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, SPANNING TREE, and so on.) without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command. The following example shows the output of the do command.
PAGE 42
Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree. Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: • To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword. • Enter ? after a command prompt to list all of the available keywords.
PAGE 43
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL-P or the UP arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word.
PAGE 44
The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command. Example of the except Keyword DellEMC#show system brief | except 1 Stack MAC Reload-Type : 4c:76:25:e5:49:40 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text.
PAGE 45
• On the system that is connected over the console, this message appears: % Warning: User "" on line vty0 "10.11.130.2" is in configuration mode If either of these messages appears, Dell EMC Networking recommends coordinating with the users listed in the message so that you do not unintentionally overwrite each other’s configuration changes.
PAGE 46
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
PAGE 47
Console Access The device has one RJ-45/RS-232 console port, an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port, and a micro USB-B console port. Serial Console The RJ-45/RS-232 console port is labeled on the upper right-hand side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis. Figure 1. RJ-45 Console Port 1 RJ-45 console port. Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter.
PAGE 48
Table 2.
PAGE 49
• To avoid denial of service (DoS) attacks, a rate-limit of 10 concurrent sessions per minute in SSH is devised. Therefore, you might experience a failure in executing SSH-related scripts when multiple short SSH commands are executed. • If you issue an interactive command in the SSH session, the behavior may not really be interactive.
PAGE 50
interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2 Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask 3 • ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). • mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely.
PAGE 51
◦ 8 — input the password that is already encrypted using sha256–based encryption method. – password: Enter the password string for the user. – dynamic-salt: Generates an additional random input to password encryption process whenever the password is configured. – privilege level: Assign a privilege levels to the user. The range is from 0 to 15. – role role-name: Assign a role name for the user.
PAGE 52
Copy Files to and from the System The command syntax for copying files is similar to UNIX. The copy command uses the format copy source-file-url destination-file-url. NOTE: For a detailed description of the copy command, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference. • To copy a local file to a remote system, combine the file-origin syntax for a local file location with the file-destination syntax for a remote file location.
PAGE 53
Before executing any CLI command to perform file operations, you must first mount the NFS file system to a mount-point on the device. Since multiple mount-points exist on a device, it is mandatory to specify the mount-point to which you want to load the system. The /f10/mnt/nfs directory is the root of all mount-points. To mount an NFS file system, perform the following steps: Table 4.
PAGE 54
15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied DellEMC#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:///username/snoop.pcap ! 24 bytes successfully copied DellEMC# DellEMC#copy tftp://10.16.127.35/username/dv-maa-test ? flash: Copy to local file system ([flash://]filepath) nfsmount: Copy to nfs mount file system (nfsmount:///filepath) running-config remote host: Destination file name [test.
PAGE 55
Configure the Overload Bit for a Startup Scenario For information about setting the router overload bit for a specific period of time after a switch reload is implemented, see the Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) section in the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. Viewing Files You can only view file information and content on local file systems. To view a list of files or the contents of a file, use the following commands. • View a list of files on the internal flash.
PAGE 56
! Version 9.4(0.0) ! Last configuration change at Tue Mar 11 21:33:56 2014 by admin ! Startup-config last updated at Tue Mar 11 12:11:00 2014 by default ! Compressing Configuration Files You can optimize and reduce the sizes of the configuration files. You can compress the running configuration by grouping all the VLANs and the physical interfaces with the same property.
PAGE 57
Uncompressed Compressed ! ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 interface group Vlan 2 , Vlan 100 no ip address no ip address shutdown no shutdown ! ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 interface group Vlan 3 – 5 no ip address tagged te 1/1 shutdown no ip address ! shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/34 ! ip address 2.1.1.1/16 interface Vlan 1000 shutdown ip address 1.1.1.
PAGE 58
Uncompressed Compressed interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
PAGE 59
• Change the default directory. EXEC Privilege mode cd directory Enabling Software Features on Devices Using a Command Option The capability to activate software applications or components on a device using a command is supported on this platform. Starting with Release 9.4(0.0), you can enable or disable specific software features or applications that need to run on a device by using a command attribute in the CLI interface.
PAGE 60
Example of the show command-history Command Example 1: Default configuration service timestamps log datetime or service timestamps log datetime localtime DellEMC(conf)#service timestamps log datetime DellEMC#show command-history - Repeated 1 time. [May 17 15:38:55]: CMD-(CLI):[service timestamps log datetime]by default from console [May 17 15:41:40]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console - Repeated 1 time.
PAGE 61
DellEMC(conf)#no service timestamps log DellEMC# show command-history - Repeated 1 time. [1d0h26m]: CMD-(CLI):[configure]by default from console - Repeated 1 time. [May 17 15:53:10]: CMD-(CLI):[no service timestamps log]by default from console [May 17 15:53:16]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console - Repeated 3 times. [May 17 15:53:22]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console - Repeated 1 time. [May 17 15:53:36]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console - Repeated 5 times.
PAGE 62
• hash-value: (Optional). Specify the relevant hash published on iSupport.
PAGE 63
DellEMC(conf)#ip http vrf {management | } Getting Started 63
PAGE 64
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
PAGE 65
• restricting access to an EXEC mode command • moving commands from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode • restricting access A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below. Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 66
• Remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} • Move a command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} • Allow access to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level configure • Allow access to INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode. Specify all the keywords in the command.
PAGE 67
managementethernet Management Ethernet interface null Null interface port-channel Port-channel interface range Configure interface range sonet SONET interface tengigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface vlan VLAN interface DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#? end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from interface configuration mode DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#line ? aux Auxiliary line console Primary terminal line vty Virtual terminal DellEMC(conf)#
PAGE 68
• Disable all logging except on the console. CONFIGURATION mode no logging on • Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer • Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor • Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Audit and Security Logs This section describes how to configure, display, and clear audit and security logs.
PAGE 69
• Adding and deleting of users. • User access and configuration changes to the security and crypto parameters (not the key information but the crypto configuration) Important Points to Remember When you enabled RBAC and extended logging: • Only the system administrator user role can execute this command. • The system administrator and system security administrator user roles can view security events and system events.
PAGE 70
The following describes the two log messages formats: • 0 – Displays syslog messages format as described in RFC 3164, The BSD syslog Protocol • 1 – Displays syslog message format as described in RFC 5424, The SYSLOG Protocol Example of Configuring the Logging Message Format DellEMC(conf)#logging version ? <0-1> Select syslog version (default = 0) DellEMC(conf)#logging version 1 Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration To display the current contents of the logging buffer and the logging
PAGE 71
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1 On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2 On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
PAGE 72
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. • Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
PAGE 73
The following example enables login activity tracking and configures the system to store the login activity details for 12 days. DellEMC(config)#login statistics enable DellEMC(config)#login statistics time-period 12 Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command.
PAGE 74
Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. DellEMC# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
PAGE 75
login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4. DellEMC(config)#login concurrent-session limit 4 Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command.
PAGE 76
Enabling Secured CLI Mode The secured CLI mode prevents the users from enhancing the permissions or promoting the privilege levels. • Enter the following command to enable the secured CLI mode: CONFIGURATION Mode secure-cli enable After entering the command, save the running-configuration. Once you save the running-configuration, the secured CLI mode is enabled. If you do not want to enter the secured mode, do not save the running-configuration.
PAGE 77
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. • Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
PAGE 78
logging buffered size • NOTE: When you decrease the buffer size, Dell EMC Networking OS deletes all messages stored in the buffer. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages in the buffer. Specify the number of messages that Dell EMC Networking OS saves to its logging history table.
PAGE 79
logging facility [facility-type] – auth (for authorization messages) – cron (for system scheduler messages) – daemon (for system daemons) – kern (for kernel messages) – local0 (for local use) – local1 (for local use) – local2 (for local use) – local3 (for local use) – local4 (for local use) – local5 (for local use) – local6 (for local use) – local7 (for local use) – lpr (for line printer system messages) – mail (for mail system messages) – news (for USENET news messages) – sys9 (system use) – sys10 (system
PAGE 80
Configure the following parameters for the virtual terminal lines: • number: the range is from zero (0) to 8. • end-number: the range is from 1 to 8. You can configure multiple virtual terminals at one time by entering a number and an end-number. 2 Configure a level and set the maximum number of messages to print. LINE mode logging synchronous [level severity-level | all] [limit] Configure the following optional parameters: • level severity-level: the range is from 0 to 7. The default is 2.
PAGE 81
- Repeated 1 time.
PAGE 82
DellEMC(conf)#service timestamps log uptime DellEMC#show clock 15:51:47.
PAGE 83
%STKUNIT1-M:CP %FILEMGR-5-FILESAVED: Copied running-config to startup-config in flash by default - repeated 3 times %STKUNIT1-M:CP %FILEMGR-5-FILESAVED: Copied running-config to startup-config in flash by default File Transfer Services With Dell EMC Networking OS, you can configure the system to transfer files over the network using the file transfer protocol (FTP).
PAGE 84
ftp-server topdir dir • The default is the internal flash directory. Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password Configure the following optional and required parameters: – username: enter a text string. – encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: enter a text string.
PAGE 85
Denying and Permitting Access to a Terminal Line Dell EMC Networking recommends applying only standard access control lists (ACLs) to deny and permit access to VTY lines. • Layer 3 ACLs deny all traffic that is not explicitly permitted, but in the case of VTY lines, an ACL with no rules does not deny traffic. • You cannot use the show ip accounting access-list command to display the contents of an ACL that is applied only to a VTY line.
PAGE 86
exec-timeout 0 0 access-class testpermit ipv4 access-class testv6deny ipv6 ! Configuring Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can use any combination of up to six authentication methods to authenticate a user on a terminal line. A combination of authentication methods is called a method list. If the user fails the first authentication method, Dell EMC Networking OS prompts the next method until all methods are exhausted, at which point the connection is terminated.
PAGE 87
Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell EMC Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands. • Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY. Disable EXEC time out by setting the timeout period to 0. LINE mode • exec-timeout minutes [seconds] Return to the default timeout values.
PAGE 88
login: admin DellEMC# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell EMC Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. • Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you set autolock, every time a user is in CONFIGURATION mode, all other users are denied access.
PAGE 89
Enter the stack-unit keyword and the keyword all to view the reason for the last system reboot of all stack units in the stack.
PAGE 90
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
PAGE 91
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
PAGE 92
• Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication • Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Port-Authentication Process The authentication process begins when the authenticator senses that a link status has changed from down to up: 1 When the authenticator senses a link state change, it requests that the supplicant identify itself using an EAP Identity Request frame. 2 The supplicant responds with its identity in an EAP Response Identity frame.
PAGE 93
Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.1X-triggered Access-Request messages: Attribute 31 Calling-station-id: relays the supplicant MAC address to the authentication server. Attribute 41 NAS-Port-Type: NAS-port physical port type. 15 indicates Ethernet. Attribute 61 NAS-Port: the physical port number by which the authenticator is connected to the supplicant.
PAGE 94
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2 Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3 Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.
PAGE 95
In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. DellEMC#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! DellEMC# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. DellEMC#show dot1x interface GigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
PAGE 96
802.1x profile information ----------------------------Dot1x Profile test Profile MACs 00:00:00:00:01:11 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile To configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile, use the mac command. You can configure 1 to 6 MAC addresses. • Configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile. DOT1X PROFILE CONFIG (conf-dot1x-profile) mac mac-address mac-address — Enter the keyword mac and type up to the 48– bit MAC addresses using the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
PAGE 97
Untagged VLAN id: Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts:3 Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: None Enable 100 Enable 200 Enable 300 Disable Enable Sample 90 seconds 120 seconds 10 30 seconds 30 seconds 7200 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Criti
PAGE 98
Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions When the authenticator sends a Request Identity frame and the supplicant does not respond, the authenticator waits for 30 seconds and then re-transmits the frame.
PAGE 99
Example of Configuring and Verifying Port Authentication The following example shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame: • after 90 seconds and a maximum of 10 times for an unresponsive supplicant • re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame The bold lines show the new re-transmit interval, new quiet period, and new maximum re-transmissions.
PAGE 100
Port Control: Port Auth Status: Re-Authentication: Untagged VLAN id: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: FORCE_AUTHORIZED UNAUTHORIZED Disable None 90 seconds 120 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Re-Authenticating a Port You can configure the authenticator for periodic re-authentication.
PAGE 101
Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authentication server is unresponsive, the authenticator terminates the authentication process after 30 seconds by default. You can configure the amount of time the authenticator waits for a response.
PAGE 102
Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports dynamic VLAN assignment when using 802.1X. The basis for VLAN assignment is RADIUS attribute 81, Tunnel-Private-Group-ID.
PAGE 103
5 Verify that the port has been authorized and placed in the desired VLAN (refer to the illustration in Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Typically, the authenticator (the Dell system) denies the supplicant access to the network until the supplicant is authenticated.
PAGE 104
Example of Configuring Maximum Authentication Attempts DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/1)#dot1x guest-vlan 200 DellEMC(conf-if-gi 2/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/1)#dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-g
PAGE 105
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs To minimize the number of entries in CAM, enable and configure the ACL CAM feature. Use this feature when you apply ACLs to a VLAN (or a set of VLANs) and when you apply ACLs to a set of ports.
PAGE 106
• The ACL VLAN group is deleted and it does not contain VLAN members. • The ACL is applied or removed from a group and the ACL group does not contain a VLAN member. • The description of the ACL group is added or removed. Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN Groups Keep the following points in mind when you configure ACL VLAN groups: • The interfaces where you apply the ACL VLAN group function as restricted interfaces.
PAGE 107
description description 3 Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit 4 Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5 Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
PAGE 108
EXEC Privilege mode DellEMC#show cam-usage switch Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|============|============|============= 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%. Viewing CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL sub- partitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 109
2 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL 3 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
PAGE 110
To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of these commands. By default, zero groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP. ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default. You must also allocate the slices for CAM optimization. To display the number of FP blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services, use the show cam-acl-vlan command. After you configure the ACL VLAN groups, reboot the system to store the settings in nonvolatile storage.
PAGE 111
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
PAGE 112
Topics: • IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) • Important Points to Remember • IP Fragment Handling • Configure a Standard IP ACL • Configure an Extended IP ACL • Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface • Applying an IP ACL • Configure Ingress ACLs • Configure Egress ACLs • IP Prefix Lists • ACL Remarks • ACL Resequencing • Route Maps • Logging of ACL Processes • Flow-Based Monitoring IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking switch/router
PAGE 113
CAM Usage The following section describes CAM allocation and CAM optimization. • User Configurable CAM Allocation • CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.
PAGE 114
If counters are enabled on ACL rules that are already configured, those counters are reset when a new rule which is inserted or prepended or appended requires a hardware shift in the flow table. Resetting the counters to 0 is transient as the proginal counter values are retained after a few seconds. If there is no need to shift the flow in the hardware, the counters are not affected.
PAGE 115
DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#exit DellEMC(conf)#class-map match-all cmap1 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#match ip access-group acl1 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#exit DellEMC(conf)#class-map match-all cmap2 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#match ip access-group acl2 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#exit DellEMC(conf)#policy-map-input pmap DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 7 class-map cmap1 DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 4 class-map cmap2 DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 10/1 DellEMC(
PAGE 116
Configured Route Map Examples The default action is permit and the default sequence number starts at 10. When you use the keyword deny in configuring a route map, routes that meet the match filters are not redistributed. To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
PAGE 117
Configure Route Map Filters Within ROUTE-MAP mode, there are match and set commands. • match commands search for a certain criterion in the routes. • set commands change the characteristics of routes, either adding something or specifying a level. When there are multiple match commands with the same parameter under one instance of route-map, Dell EMC Networking OS does a match between all of those match commands.
PAGE 118
• Match routes whose next hop is a specific interface. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match interface interface The parameters are: – For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. – For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 119
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of match commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of match filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configuring Set Conditions To configure a set condition, use the following commands. • Add an AS-PATH number to the beginning of the AS-PATH. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set as-path prepend as-number [...
PAGE 120
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of set commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of set filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution Route maps on their own cannot affect traffic and must be included in different commands to affect routing traffic.
PAGE 121
Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found. The following example shows a continue clause at the end of a route-map module. In this example, if a match is found in the route-map “test” module 10, module 30 is processed.
PAGE 122
DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#permit ip any 10.1.1.1/32 DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl) Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples The following examples show the ACL commands for Layer 4 packet filtering. Permit an ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present: If a packet’s L3 information matches the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked. • If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is permitted. • If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL entry is processed.
PAGE 123
A standard IP ACL uses the source IP address as its match criterion. 1 Enter IP ACCESS LIST mode by naming a standard IP access list. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard access-listname 2 Configure a drop or forward filter. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] NOTE: When assigning sequence numbers to filters, keep in mind that you might need to insert a new filter.
PAGE 124
ip access-list standard access-list-name 2 Configure a drop or forward IP ACL filter. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
PAGE 125
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ip-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator [portnumber ] [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
PAGE 126
Configuring Filters Without a Sequence Number If you are creating an extended ACL with only one or two filters, you can let Dell EMC Networking OS assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured. Dell EMC Networking OS assigns filters in multiples of five. To configure a filter for an extended IP ACL without a specified sequence number, use any or all of the following commands: • Configure a deny or permit filter to examine IP packets.
PAGE 127
• L2 egress access list If a rule is simply appended, existing counters are not affected. Table 7. L2 and L3 Filtering on Switched Packets L2 ACL Behavior L3 ACL Behavior Decision on Targeted Traffic Deny Deny L3 ACL denies. Deny Permit L3 ACL permits. Permit Deny L3 ACL denies. Permit Permit L3 ACL permits. NOTE: If you configure an interface as a vlan-stack access port, only the L2 ACL filters the packets. The L3 ACL applied to such a port does not affect traffic.
PAGE 128
ip access-list [standard | extended] name To view which IP ACL is applied to an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode, or use the show runningconfig command in EXEC mode. Example of Viewing ACLs Applied to an Interface DellEMC(conf-if)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.2.1.100 255.255.255.0 ip access-group nimule in no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if)# To filter traffic on Telnet sessions, use only standard ACLs in the access-class command.
PAGE 129
seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.2 Configure Egress ACLs Egress ACLs are applied to line cards and affect the traffic leaving the system. Configuring egress ACLs onto physical interfaces protects the system infrastructure from attack — malicious and incidental — by explicitly allowing only authorized traffic. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation.
PAGE 130
Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane) By default, packets originated from the system are not filtered by egress ACLs. For example, if you initiate a ping session from the system and apply an egress ACL to block this type of traffic on the interface, the ACL does not affect that ping traffic. The Control Plane Egress Layer 3 ACL feature enhances IP reachability debugging by implementing control-plane ACLs for CPU-generated and CPU-forwarded traffic.
PAGE 131
• After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route. Implementation Information In Dell EMC Networking OS, prefix lists are used in processing routes for routing protocols (for example, router information protocol [RIP], open shortest path first [OSPF], and border gateway protocol [BGP]). NOTE: It is important to know which protocol your system supports prior to implementing prefix-lists.
PAGE 132
ip prefix-list juba seq 12 deny 134.23.0.0/16 seq 15 deny 120.0.0.0/8 le 16 seq 20 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)# NOTE: The last line in the prefix list Juba contains a “permit all” statement. By including this line in a prefix list, you specify that all routes not matching any criteria in the prefix list are forwarded. To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command in PREFIX LIST mode.
PAGE 133
Examples of the show ip prefix-list Command The following example shows the show ip prefix-list detail command. DellEMC>show ip prefix detail Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 seq 5 deny 1.102.0.0/16 le 32 (hit count: 0) seq 6 deny 2.1.0.0/16 ge 23 (hit count: 0) seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 0) ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 seq 5 deny 100.100.1.
PAGE 134
network 10.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)#router ospf 34 Applying a Filter to a Prefix List (OSPF) To apply a filter to routes in open shortest path first (OSPF), use the following commands. • Enter OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode • router ospf Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes. You can specify an interface. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded.
PAGE 135
ip access-list {extended | standard} access-list-name ipv6 access-list {extended | standard} access-list-name 2 Define the ACL rule. CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode or CONFIG-STD-NACL seq sequence-number {permit | deny} options 3 Write a remark. CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode or CONFIG-STD-NACL remark [remark-number] remark-text The remark number is optional.
PAGE 136
ACL Resequencing ACL resequencing allows you to re-number the rules and remarks in an access or prefix list. The placement of rules within the list is critical because packets are matched against rules in sequential order. To order new rules using the current numbering scheme, use resequencing whenever there is no opportunity. For example, the following table contains some rules that are numbered in increments of 1.
PAGE 137
ip access-list extended test remark 4 XYZ remark 5 this remark corresponds to permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 5 permit ip any host 1.1.1.1 remark 9 ABC remark 10 this remark corresponds to permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 15 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 20 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 DellEMC# end DellEMC# resequence access-list ipv4 test 2 2 DellEMC# show running-config acl ! ip access-list extended test remark 2 XYZ remark 4 this remark corresponds to permit any host 1.1.1.
PAGE 138
Route maps also have an “implicit deny.” Unlike ACLs and prefix lists; however, where the packet or traffic is dropped, in route maps, if a route does not match any of the route map conditions, the route is not redistributed. The implementation of route maps allows route maps with the no match or no set commands. When there is no match command, all traffic matches the route map and the set command applies. Logging of ACL Processes This functionality is supported on the platform.
PAGE 139
Guidelines for Configuring ACL Logging This functionality is supported on the platform. Keep the following points in mind when you configure logging of ACL activities: • During initialization, the ACL logging application tags the ACL rule indices for which a match condition exists as being in-use, which ensures that the same rule indices are not reused by ACL logging again.
PAGE 140
IPv6 ACLs, and standard and extended MAC ACLs. Configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [log [interval minutes]] Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only the specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 141
If you configure the flow-based enable command and do not apply an ACL on the source port or the monitored port, both flow-based monitoring and port mirroring do not function. You cannot apply the same ACL to an interface or a monitoring session context simultaneously. The port mirroring application maintains a database that contains all monitoring sessions (including port monitor sessions).
PAGE 142
flow-based enable 2 Define access-list rules that include the keyword monitor. Dell Networking OS only considers port monitoring traffic that matches rules with the keyword monitor. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list For more information, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Apply the ACL to the monitored port.
PAGE 143
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
PAGE 144
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
PAGE 145
Field Description Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet. My Discriminator A random number generated by the local system to identify the session. Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface.
PAGE 146
Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator. Either system (but not both) can request Demand mode at any time. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS supports Asynchronous mode only. A session can have four states: Administratively Down, Down, Init, and Up. State Description Administratively Down The local system does not participate in a particular session.
PAGE 147
Figure 10.
PAGE 148
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
PAGE 149
Configure BFD This section contains the following procedures. • Configure BFD for Static Routes • Configure BFD for OSPF • Configure BFD for OSPFv3 • Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol.
PAGE 150
Viewing Physical Port Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role (active). Dell EMC Networking recommends maintaining the default values. To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Example of Viewing Session Parameters R1(conf-if-gi-4/24)#bfd interval 100 min_rx 100 multiplier 4 role passive R1(conf-if-gi-4/24)#do show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 151
If the remote system state changes due to the local state administration being down, this message displays: R2>01:32:53: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Down for neighbor 2.2.2.1 on interface Gi 2/1 (diag: 7) Configure BFD for Static Routes BFD offers systems a link state detection mechanism for static routes.
PAGE 152
R1(conf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 Gi 4/24 Up 200 200 4 R To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Nondefault VRF You can also create nondefault VRFs and establish sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
PAGE 153
Establishing Static Route Sessions on Specific Neighbors You can selectively enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors based on a destination prefix-list. When you establish a BFD session using the ip route bfd command, all the next-hop neighbors in the static route become part of the BFD session. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS release 9.11.0.0, you can enable BFD sessions on specific next-hop neighbors.
PAGE 154
CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down packet is sent to all neighbors on the remote systems, and those neighbors change to the Down state. To disable BFD for static routes, use the following command.
PAGE 155
B C I O O3 R M V VT - LocalAddr * 11::1 BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel RemoteAddr 11::2 Interface Gi 1/1 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Up 200 200 3 R To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information.
PAGE 156
The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the nondefault VRFs.
PAGE 157
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Enable BFD globally.
PAGE 158
INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O 2.2.3.
PAGE 159
B C I O O3 R - BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 10.1.3.2 RemoteAddr 10.1.3.1 Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Gi 1/3 Up 300 250 3 C DellEMC# show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 10.1.3.2 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:02:15:0e Remote Addr: 10.1.3.
PAGE 160
Disabling BFD for OSPF If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. Disabling BFD does not trigger a change in BFD clients; a final Admin Down packet is sent before the session is terminated. To disable BFD sessions, use the following commands. • Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors.
PAGE 161
C I O O3 R M V VT - CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 1.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 1.1.1.2 Interface Gi 1/1 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Up 200 200 3 O * 2.1.1.1 2.1.1.
PAGE 162
R M V VT - Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr Clients * 10.1.1.1 511 O RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult VRF 10.1.1.2 Vl 100 Up 150 150 3 * 11.1.1.1 511 O 11.1.1.2 Vl 101 Up 150 150 3 * 12.1.1.1 511 O 12.1.1.2 Vl 102 Up 150 150 3 * 13.1.1.1 511 O 13.1.1.
PAGE 163
To disable BFD sessions, use the following commands. • Disable BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode no bfd all-neighbors • Disable BFD sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for IS-IS When using BFD with IS-IS, the IS-IS protocol registers with the BFD manager on the RPM. BFD sessions are then established with all neighboring interfaces participating in IS-IS.
PAGE 164
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
PAGE 165
Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
PAGE 166
For example, the following illustration shows a sample BFD configuration on Router 1 and Router 2 that use eBGP in a transit network to interconnect AS1 and AS2. The eBGP routers exchange information with each other as well as with iBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility within each autonomous system. Figure 15.
PAGE 167
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: • Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors for Default VRF To establish sessions with either IPv6 or IPv4 BGP neighbors for the default VRF, follow these steps: 1 Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable 2 Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode.
PAGE 168
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#address-family ipv6 unicast DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#neighbor 20::2 activate DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#exit DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#bfd all-neighbors DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 1 neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 2 neighbor 10.1.1.
PAGE 169
9 Activate the neighbor in IPv6 address family. CONFIG-ROUTERBGPv6_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor ipv6-address activate 10 Configure parameters for a BFD session established with all neighbors discovered by BGP. Or establish a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor or peer group using the default BFD session parameters. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode bfd all-neighbors DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)#neighbor 10.1.1.
PAGE 170
• Verify a BFD for BGP configuration. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config bgp • Verify that a BFD for BGP session has been successfully established with a BGP neighbor. A line-by-line listing of established BFD adjacencies is displayed. EXEC Privilege mode • show bfd neighbors [interface] [detail] Check to see if BFD is enabled for BGP connections. EXEC Privilege mode • show ip bgp summary Displays routing information exchanged with BGP neighbors, including BFD for BGP sessions.
PAGE 171
Remote MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:8a:da:7b Int: GigabitEthernet 6/1 State: Up Configured parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Neighbor parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Actual parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: True Client Registered: BGP Uptime: 00:07:55 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 4762 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 4490 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number
PAGE 172
• Message displays when you enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor using the neighbor ip-address bfd command. • Message displays when you enable a BGP neighbor in a peer group for which you enabled a BFD session using the neighbor peergroup-name bfd command R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.2 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.2, remote AS 1, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.
PAGE 173
Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM). BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in VRRP. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent on the line card notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the VRRP protocol that a link state change occurred. Configuring BFD for VRRP is a three-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. Refer to Enabling BFD Globally.
PAGE 174
Establishing VRRP Sessions on VRRP Neighbors The master router does not care about the state of the backup router, so it does not participate in any VRRP BFD sessions. VRRP BFD sessions on the backup router cannot change to the UP state. Configure the master router to establish an individual VRRP session the backup router. To establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor, use the following command. • Establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor.
PAGE 175
INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] • Change parameters for a particular VRRP session. INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down.
PAGE 176
9 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an interdomain routing protocol that manages routing between edge routers. BGP uses an algorithm to exchange routing information between switches enabled with BGP. BGP determines a path to reach a particular destination using certain attributes while avoiding routing loops. BGP selects a single path as the best path to a destination network or host. You can also influence BGP to select different path by altering some of the BGP attributes.
PAGE 177
connections from one network to another. The ISP is considered to be “selling transit service” to the customer network, so thus the term Transit AS. The devices within an AS (AS1 or AS2, as seen in the following illustration) exchange routing information using Internal BGP (IBGP), whereas the devices in different AS communicate using External BGP (EBGP). IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS.
PAGE 178
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. AS4 Number Representation Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported.
PAGE 179
ASDOT+ representation splits the full binary 4-byte AS number into two words of 16 bits separated by a decimal point (.): .. Some examples are shown in the following table. • • All AS numbers between 0 and 65535 are represented as a decimal number, when entered in the CLI and when displayed in the show commands outputs. AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as ..
PAGE 180
router bgp 100 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS4 SUPPORT DISABLED DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.
PAGE 181
Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies. In order to make decisions in its operations with other BGP peers, a BGP process uses a simple finite state machine that consists of six states: Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm, and Established. For each peer-to-peer session, a BGP implementation tracks which of these six states the session is in.
PAGE 182
• Next Hop NOTE: There are no hard coded limits on the number of attributes that are supported in the BGP. Taking into account other constraints such as the Packet Size, maximum number of attributes are supported in BGP. Communities BGP communities are sets of routes with one or more common attributes. Communities are a way to assign common attributes to multiple routes at the same time. NOTE: Duplicate communities are not rejected.
PAGE 183
Best Path Selection Details 1 Prefer the path with the largest WEIGHT attribute. 2 Prefer the path with the largest LOCAL_PREF attribute. 3 Prefer the path that was locally Originated via a network command, redistribute command or aggregate-address command. a 4 Routes originated with the Originated via a network or redistribute commands are preferred over routes originated with the aggregate-address command.
PAGE 184
Weight The weight attribute is local to the router and is not advertised to neighboring routers. If the router learns about more than one route to the same destination, the route with the highest weight is preferred. The route with the highest weight is installed in the IP routing table. Local Preference Local preference (LOCAL_PREF) represents the degree of preference within the entire AS. The higher the number, the greater the preference for the route.
PAGE 185
One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path. For this example, assume the MED is the only attribute applied. In the following illustration, AS100 and AS200 connect in two places. Each connection is a BGP session. AS200 sets the MED for its T1 exit point to 100 and the MED for its OC3 exit point to 50. This sets up a path preference through the OC3 link. The MEDs are advertised to AS100 routers so they know which is the preferred path.
PAGE 186
Network *> 7.0.0.0/29 *> 7.0.0.0/30 *> 9.2.0.0/16 Next Hop 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 Metric 0 0 10 LocPrf 0 0 0 Weight 18508 18508 18508 Path ? ? 701 i AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a EBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example.
PAGE 187
MBGP allows information about the topology of the IP multicast-capable routers to be exchanged separately from the topology of normal IPv4 and IPv6 unicast routers. It allows a multicast routing topology different from the unicast routing topology. MBGP uses either an IPv4 address configured on the interface (which is used to establish the IPv6 session) or a stable IPv4 address that is available in the box as the next-hop address.
PAGE 188
Example of BGP configuration command levels Following is an example configuration, which explains the neighbor configuration for all the address families. Also, the configuration shows how to create address families (IPv4 and IPv6) and activate the neighbors in the address family. DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 10 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 20.20.20.1 remote-as 200 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 20.20.20.
PAGE 189
Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS. Additional Path (Add-Path) Support The add-path feature reduces convergence times by advertising multiple paths to its peers for the same address prefix without replacing existing paths with new ones. By default, a BGP speaker advertises only the best path to its peers for a given address prefix.
PAGE 190
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
PAGE 191
3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website.
PAGE 192
• Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer. • Multiple instances of the same NLRI in the BGP RIB are not supported and are set to zero in the SNMP query response. • The f10BgpM2NlriIndex and f10BgpM2AdjRibsOutIndex fields are not used. • Carrying MPLS labels in BGP is not supported. The f10BgpM2NlriOpaqueType and f10BgpM2NlriOpaquePointer fields are set to zero. • 4-byte ASN is supported.
PAGE 193
Restrictions Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one BGP routing configuration and autonomous system (AS), but supports multiple address family configuration. Enabling BGP By default, BGP is disabled on the system. Dell EMC Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To enable the BGP process and begin exchanging information, assign an AS number and use commands in ROUTER BGP mode to configure a BGP neighbor.
PAGE 194
Example configuration steps to enable BGP NOTE: When you change the configuration of a BGP neighbor, always reset it by entering the clear ip bgp * command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, enter show config in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view the BGP status, use the show ip bgp summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows that the summary with a 2-byte AS number using the show ip bgp summary command.
PAGE 195
Last read 00:00:00, Last write 00:00:07 Hold time is 90, keepalive interval is 30 seconds Received 18 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 6 notifications, 0 updates 5 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 26 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 0 notifications, 0 updates 19 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Route refresh request: received 0, sent messages 0 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP local RIB : R
PAGE 196
Changing a BGP router ID BGP uses the configured router ID to identify the devices in the network. By default, the router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface. If no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router is used as the BGP router ID. To change the default BGP router ID, use the following command. • Change the BGP router ID of a BGP router ROUTER BGP mode bgp router-id ip-address ip-address- IP address in dotted decimal format.
PAGE 197
• Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain • NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell EMC Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot • Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ Examples of the bgp asnotation Commands The following example shows the bgp asnotation asplain command output.
PAGE 198
Configuring a BGP peer To configure a BGP neighbor or peer, you must provide the IP address and the AS number of each neighbor since BGP does not discover the neighbor or peer. Neighbors that are present with the same AS communicate using IBGP while the neighbors that are present in different AS communicate using EBGP. To allow the neighbor to establish a BGP session, you have to enable the neighbor by providing neighbor no shutdown command. To configure BGP between two peers, use the following commands.
PAGE 199
Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers The following example show how BGP is configured between two peers. Figure 23. BGP topology with two AS To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers Example of enabling BGP in Router A Following is an example to enable BGP configuration in the router A.
PAGE 200
Following is the sample output for show ip bgp summary command for Router B. RouterB#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 172.17.1.99, local 45000 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 1 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 192.168.1.2 AS 40000 MsgRcvd 10 MsgSent 20 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:06:11 0 BGP peer group To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group.
PAGE 201
3 Enable the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown By default, all peer groups are disabled. 4 Create a BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address} remote-as as-number 5 Enable the neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address} no shutdown NOTE: You can use neighbor shutdown command to disable a BGP neighbor or a peer group. 6 Add an enabled neighbor to the peer group.
PAGE 202
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. When you create a peer group, it is disabled (shutdown). The following example shows the creation of a peer group (zanzibar) (in bold). To enable a peer group, use the neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown command.
PAGE 203
Figure 24. BGP peer group example configurations Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/32 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int gi 1/21 R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.
PAGE 204
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 remote 100 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shutdown neighbor 10.0.3.
PAGE 205
R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)# R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 neighbor 10.0.3.
PAGE 206
R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer AAA R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer BBB R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor BBB peer-group neighbor BBB no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.1 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer-group CCC neighbor 192.
PAGE 207
Route-refresh and Soft-reconfiguration BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for faster and easier route changing. Changing routing policies typically requires a reset of BGP sessions (the TCP connection) for the policies to take effect. Such resets cause undue interruption to traffic due to hard reset of the BGP cache and the time it takes to re-establish the session. BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for policies to be applied to a session without clearing the BGP Session.
PAGE 208
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.108.1.1 soft-reconfiguration inbound DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit Route-refresh This section explains how the soft-reconfiguration and route-refresh works. Soft-reconfiguration has to be configured explicitly for a neighbor unlike route refresh, which is automatically negotiated between BGP peers when establishing a peer session.
PAGE 209
In the below example, under the IPv6 address family configuration, only the IPv6 neighbor is enabled using neighbor ipv6–address activate command. If you execute, clear ip bgp neighbor-ipv4–address soft in command, only the IPv4 route-refresh update is sent. If you execute clear ip bgp neighbor-ipv6–address soft incommand, both the IPv4 and IPv6 route-refresh updates are sent.
PAGE 210
reducing the convergence time. You can configure BGP to configure and advertise aggregated routes. At least one specific route of the aggregate must be in the routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. To aggregate routes, use the following command. AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route. • Assign the IP address and mask of the prefix to be aggregated.
PAGE 211
Suppressing BGP aggregate routes The routes that are suppressed are not advertised to any of the BGP neighbors. You can suppress the aggregate routes using the suppress-map or summary-only options in the aggregate-address configuration. To suppress the advertisement of the aggregate routes using BGP, use the following commands. • Create an aggregate entry and suppress the advertisement of specific routes to all neighbors.
PAGE 212
Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists. A regular expression is a special character used to define a pattern that is then compared with an input string. For an AS-path access list, as shown in the previous commands, if the AS path matches the regular expression in the access list, the route matches the access list. The following lists the regular expressions accepted in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 213
DellEMC(config-as-path)#ex DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 99 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.
PAGE 214
ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create multiple prefix list filters with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | ip-prefix [ge | le] } • ge: minimum prefix length to be matched. • le: maximum prefix length to me matched. For information about configuring prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode.
PAGE 215
Filtering BGP Routes Using Route Maps To filter routes using a route map, use these commands. 1 Create a route map and assign it a name. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2 Create multiple route map filters with a match or set action. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode {match | set} For information about configuring route maps, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode.
PAGE 216
Filtering on an AS-Path Attribute You can use the BGP attribute, AS_PATH, to manipulate routing policies. The AS_PATH attribute contains a sequence of AS numbers representing the route’s path. As the route traverses an AS, the ASN is prepended to the route. You can manipulate routes based on their AS_PATH to affect interdomain routing. By identifying certain ASN in the AS_PATH, you can permit or deny routes based on the number in its AS_PATH. AS-PATH ACLs use regular expressions to search AS_PATH values.
PAGE 217
20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 --More-- 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 i i i i i i i i i i Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
PAGE 218
To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view which BGP routes meet an IP community or IP extended community list’s criteria, use the show ip bgp {community-list | extcommunity-list} command in EXEC Privilege mode. Configuring BGP Fast Fall-Over By default, a BGP session is governed by the hold time.
PAGE 219
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 52, neighbor version 52 4 accepted prefixes consume 16 bytes Prefix advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 6; dropped 5 Last reset 00:19:37, due to Reset by peer Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 5 Recv: 0 Local host: 20.20.20.2, Local port: 65519 Foreign host: 10.10.10.
PAGE 220
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive limit Enter the limit keyword to restrict the number of sessions accepted. 2 Assign a subnet to the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask The peer group responds to OPEN messages sent on this subnet. 3 Enable the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown 4 Create and specify a remote peer for BGP neighbor.
PAGE 221
• Enable graceful restart for the BGP node. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart • Set maximum restart time, in seconds, to restart and bring-up all the peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [restart-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time, in seconds, to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds.
PAGE 222
– metric value: The value is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • – route-map map-name: Specify the name of a configured route map to be consulted before adding the ISIS route. Include specific OSPF routes into BGP. ROUTER BGP or CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_ AF mode redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – ospf: Indicates that you are redistributing OSPF routes in BGP.
PAGE 223
neighbor 20::3 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast bgp redistribute-internal ! neighbor 20::2 activate neighbor 20::3 activate exit-address-family interface Vlan 10 ip address 10.10.10.1/24 ipv6 address 10::1/64 ipv6 ospf 1 area 0 tagged Port-channel 10 ip ospf priority 255 no shutdown The following is an example configuration of redistributing iBGP routes into OSPF with a non-default VRF: interface Vlan 11 ip vrf forwarding core1 ip address 11.11.11.
PAGE 224
metric-style wide level-1 metric-style wide level-2 net 11.1000.6000.6006.00 redistribute bgp 65535 ! address-family ipv6 unicast redistribute bgp 65535 exit-address-family ! interface Vlan 10 ip address 10.10.10.2/24 ipv6 address 10::2/64 tagged Port-channel 10 ip router isis 100 ipv6 router isis 100 vrrp bfd all-neighbors ! vrrp-group 1 virtual-address 10.10.10.100 ! vrrp-ipv6-group 1 virtual-address 10::100 virtual-address fe80::10 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 11 ip vrf forwarding core1 ip address 11.
PAGE 225
2 • receive: Indicate that the system accepts multiple paths from peers. • path-count: Indicate that the system sends multiple paths to peers. The range is from 2 to 64. Allow the specified neighbor or peer group to allow multiple path advertisements.
PAGE 226
• community-number: use AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 Bytes or 4 Bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system. • local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. • no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. • no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. • quote-regexp: then any number of regular expressions. The software applies all regular expressions in the list. • regexp: then a regular expression.
PAGE 227
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION COMMUNITY-LIST or CONFIGURATION EXTCOMMUNITY LIST mode or the show ip {community-lists | extcommunity-list} command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 228
To send the COMMUNITY attribute to BGP neighbors, use the following command. • Enable the software to send the router’s COMMUNITY attribute to the BGP neighbor or peer group specified. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} send-community [extended | standard] extended- Allows to send the extended community attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. standard- Allows to send the standard community attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group.
PAGE 229
To view BGP routes matching a certain community number or a pre-defined BGP community, use the show ip bgp community command in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.48 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network * i 3.0.0.0/8 *>i 4.2.49.12/30 * i 4.21.132.0/23 *>i 4.24.118.16/30 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.
PAGE 230
Manipulating the LOCAL_PREFERENCE attribute A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREFERENCE attribute value is to use a route-map. To change the usage of LOCAL_PREFERENCE attribute to choose the best path among the advertised, enter any or all of the following commands. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route-map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2 Change LOCAL_PREF value for routes meeting the criteria of this route-map.
PAGE 231
neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self [all] • If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. Sets the next hop address.
PAGE 232
maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number Configure the following parameters: – ebgp: Enable multipath support for external BGP routes. – ibgp: Enable multipath support for internal BGP routes. – number: Maximum number of parallel paths. The range is from 2 to 64.
PAGE 233
Configuring BGP Route Reflectors BGP route reflectors are intended for ASs with a large mesh; they reduce the amount of BGP control traffic. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. With route reflection configured properly, IBGP routers are not fully meshed within a cluster but all receive routing information.
PAGE 234
• Withdraw • Readvertise • Attribute change When dampening is applied to a route, its path is described by one of the following terms: • history entry — an entry that stores information on a downed route • dampened path — a path that is no longer advertised • penalized path — a path that is assigned a penalty To configure route flap dampening parameters, set dampening parameters using a route map, clear information on route dampening and return suppressed routes to active state, view statistics
PAGE 235
– regexp regular-expression: enter a regular express to match on. • By default, the path selection in Dell EMC Networking OS is deterministic, that is, paths are compared irrespective of the order of their arrival. You can change the path selection method to non-deterministic, that is, paths are compared in the order in which they arrived (starting with the most recent). Furthermore, in non-deterministic mode, the software may not compare MED attributes though the paths are from the same AS.
PAGE 236
Changing BGP keepalive and hold timers BGP uses timers to control the activity of sending the keepalive messages to its neighbors or peers. Also, you can adjust the interval of how long the device has to wait for a keepalive messge from a neighbor before declaring the peer dead. To configure BGP timers, use either or both of the following commands. To change the BGP timers for all neighbors, use timers bgp command.
PAGE 237
Setting the extended timer To configure BGP idle hold time, use the following commands. Timer values configured with the neighbor timers extended command override the timer values configured with the timers bgp extended command. The peer remains in idle state based on the configured idle-holdtime. The less the idle-holdtime, lesser the peer remains in idle state.
PAGE 238
2 Shut down the BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast address family using the following command: shutdown address-family-ipv4-unicast To enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to IPv4 multicast address family: 1 Enter the router bgp mode using the following command: CONFIGURATION Mode router bgp as-number 2 Shut down the BGP neighbors corresponding to IPv4 multicast address family using the following command: ROUTER-BGP Mode shutdown address-family-ipv4-multicast To enable or disable
PAGE 239
Match a Clause with a Continue Clause The continue feature can exist without a match clause. Without a match clause, the continue clause executes and jumps to the specified route-map entry. With a match clause and a continue clause, the match clause executes first and the continue clause next in a specified route map entry. The continue clause launches only after a successful match.
PAGE 240
Configuring a BGP VRF address family To perform BGP configuration between two neighbors that must exchange IPv6 or IPv4 VRF information, use the following commands. Following are the steps to configure BGP VRF address-family between two peers. • Configure a VRF routing table. CONFIG mode ip vrf vrf-name • For more information on VRF configuration, see Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF). Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number.
PAGE 241
1 neighbor(s) using 16384 bytes of memory Neighbor 50.0.0.2 AS 200 MsgRcvd 0 MsgSent 0 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:00:00 0 Following is the output of show running-config bgp command for the above configuration. DellEMC#show running-config bgp ! router bgp 10 bgp router-id 1.1.1.1 network 10.10.21.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 20.20.20.1 remote-as 65550 neighbor 20.20.20.1 no shutdown ! address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 neighbor 50.0.0.
PAGE 242
network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.10.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.12.2 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.12.
PAGE 243
neighbor 192.168.12.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.12.2 no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)#R2(conf-router_bgp)# Enabling MBGP Configurations Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that carries IP multicast routes. BGP carries two sets of routes: one set for unicast routing and one set for multicast routing. The routes associated with multicast routing are used by the protocol independent multicast (PIM) to build data distribution trees.
PAGE 244
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family ipv6 [unicast | vrf vrf-name] unicast — Specifies the IPv6 unicast address family. The default address-family is IPv6 unicast. vrf vrf-name — Specifies the name of VRF instance associated with the IPv6 address-family configuration. • Enable the neighbor to exchange prefixes for IPv6 unicast address family.
PAGE 245
The neighbors configured under CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGP mode and are defined using the neighbor remote-as command exchange only IPv4 unicast address prefixes. If you want a neighbor to exchange other prefixes such as IPv4 multicast or IPv6 unicast, you have to explicitly activate the respective neighbor using neighbor activate command in the respective IPv4 multicast or IPv6 unicast address family configuration. In the above example configuration, activating the neighbor (20.20.20.
PAGE 246
R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 2001::1 remote-as 10 R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 2001::1 no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# address-family ipv4 multicast R2(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 20.20.20.1 activate R2(conf-router_bgp_af)# exit R2(conf-router_bgp)# address-family ipv6 unicast R2(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# neighbor 20.20.20.1 activate R2(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# neighbor 2001::1 activate R2(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#exit Following is the sample output for show ip bgp summary command.
PAGE 247
Figure 26. Configure IPv6 NH to advertise IPv6 prefix over IPv4 neighbor To enable BGP to pick the next hop IPv6 address automatically for IPv6 prefix advertised over an IPv4 neighbor, use the following commands. • Enable the system to pick the next hop IPv6 address dynamically for IPv6 prefix advertised over an IPv4 neighbor. ROUTER-BGP mode mode neighbor {ip–address | peer-group-name} auto-local-address Enter either the neighbor IP address or the name of the peer group.
PAGE 248
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 655 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# address-family ipv6 unicast DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 activate DellECM(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# exit Following is the show running-config command output for the above configuration. DellEMC# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 20 neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 655 neighbor 10.1.1.1 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast neighbor 10.1.1.
PAGE 249
EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out] View information about BGP KEEPALIVE messages. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalive [in | out] View information about BGP notifications received from or sent to neighbors. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] View information about BGP updates and filter by prefix name.
PAGE 250
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), 0 withdrawn by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, 0 withdrawn from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known attribute Notification History 'UPDATE error/Missing well-
PAGE 251
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell EMC Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 252
NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 512 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 256 entries. Select 2 to configure 1024 entries.
PAGE 253
NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3 Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4 Reload the system. EXEC Privilege mode reload Test CAM Usage To determine whether sufficient CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use the test-cam-usage command.
PAGE 254
VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 DellEMC(conf)# Example of Viewing CAM-ACL Settings NOTE: If you change the cam-acl setting from CONFIGURATION mode, the output of this command does not reflect any changes until you save the running-configuration and reload the chassis.
PAGE 255
IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# View CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4 and IPv6 Flow and Layer 2 ACL subpartitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode The following output shows CAM blocks usage for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs and other processes that use CAM space: Example of the show cam-usage Command DellE
PAGE 256
cam-threshold threshold {default | threshold-percent} The range of threshold value is from 1 to 100. The default threshold value is 90 percent. • Assign the silence period for syslog warning. CONFIGURATION mode cam-threshold threshold {default | threshold-percent} silence-period {default | silenceperiod-value} The range of silence period is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0 seconds.
PAGE 257
Troubleshoot CAM Profiling The following section describes CAM profiling troubleshooting. CAM Profile Mismatches The CAM profile on all cards must match the system profile. In most cases, the system corrects mismatches by copying the correct profile to the card, and rebooting the card. If three resets do not bring up the card, the system displays an error message. In this case, manually adjust the CAM configuration on the card to match the system configuration.
PAGE 258
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 259
Figure 28. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
PAGE 260
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
PAGE 261
CONTROL-PLANE mode service-policy rate-limit-protocols Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
PAGE 262
DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class_lacp qos-policy rate_limit_200k DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the control plane service policy.
PAGE 263
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#control-plane DellEMC(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy CoPP for OSPFv3 Packets You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRP, BGP, and ICMP. You can use the ipv6 access-list name cpu-qos permit ospfv3 command to allow CoPP traffic for OSPFv3.
PAGE 264
As part of enhancements, CPU queues are increased from 8 to 12 on CPU port. However, the front-end port and the backplane ports support only 8 queues. As a result, when packets are transmitted to the local CPU, the CPU uses Q0-Q11 queues. The control packets that are tunneled to the master unit are isolated from the data queues and the control queues in the backplane links. Control traffic must be sent over the control queues Q4-Q7 on higig links.
PAGE 265
• NDP Packets in VLT peer routing enable – VLT peer routing enable cases each VLT node will have route entry for link local address of both self and peer VLT node. Peer VLT link local entry will have egress port as ICL link. And Actual link local address will have entry to CopyToCpu. But NDP packets destined to peer VLT node needs to be taken to CPU and tunneled to the peer VLT node..
PAGE 266
unicast packets. This CLI knob to turn off the catch-all route is of use in networks where the user does not want to generate Destination Unreachable messages and have the CPU queue’s bandwidth available for higher priority control-plane traffic. Configuring CoPP for OSPFv3 You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRPv3, BGPv6, and ICMPv6.
PAGE 267
Viewing Queue Rates Example of Viewing Queue Rates DellEMC#show cpu-queue rate cp Service-Queue Rate (PPS) -----------------------Q0 1300 Q1 300 Q2 275 Q3 400 Q4 2000 Q5 300 Q6 400 Q7 400 Q8 400 Q9 600 Q10 300 Q11 300 DellEMC# Burst (Packets) ---------512 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Example of Viewing Queue Mapping To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
PAGE 268
TCP (BGP) ICMP VRRP any/179 any any 179/any any any DellEMC# 268 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) _ _ _ Q6 Q6 Q7 CP CP CP _ _ _
PAGE 269
12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
PAGE 270
Figure 29. DHCP packet Format The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
PAGE 271
Option Number and Description Rebinding Time Option 59 Specifies the amount of time after the IP address is granted that the client attempts to renew its lease with any server, if the original server does not respond. Vendor Class Identifer Option 60 L2 DHCP Snooping Option 82 Identifies a user-defined string used by the Relay Agent to forward DHCP client packets to a specific server.
PAGE 272
Figure 30. Client and Server Messaging Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell EMC Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell EMC Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
PAGE 273
DHCP Server Responsibilities Description keeping track of which addresses have been allocated and which are still available. Configuration Parameter Storage and Management DHCP servers also store and maintain other parameters that are sent to clients when requested. These parameters specify in detail how a client is to operate. Lease Management DHCP servers use leases to allocate addresses to clients for a limited time.
PAGE 274
Configuration Tasks To configure DHCP, an administrator must first set up a DHCP server and provide it with configuration parameters and policy information including IP address ranges, lease length specifications, and configuration data that DHCP hosts need.
PAGE 275
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution Dell systems are capable of providing DHCP clients with parameters for two methods of hostname resolution—using DNS or NetBIOS WINS. Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1 Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2 Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
PAGE 276
DHCP host—address address 3 Specify the client hardware address. DHCP hardware-address hardware-address type • hardware-address: the client MAC address. • type: the protocol of the hardware platform. The default protocol is Ethernet. Debugging the DHCP Server To debug the DHCP server, use the following command. • Display debug information for DHCP server.
PAGE 277
Figure 31. Configuring a Relay Agent To view the ip helper-address configuration for an interface, use the show ip interface command from EXEC privilege mode. Example of the show ip interface Command R1_E600#show ip int gigabitethernet 1/3 GigabitEthernet 1/3 is up, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.11.0.1/24 Broadcast address is 10.11.0.255 Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Helper address is 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.
PAGE 278
Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: • The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell EMC Networking OS version and a configuration file). BMP is enabled as a factory-default setting on a switch.
PAGE 279
To manually configure a static IP address on an interface, use the ip address command. A prompt displays to release an existing dynamically acquired IP address. If you confirm, the ability to receive a DHCP server-assigned IP address is removed. To enable acquiring a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server on an interface configured with a static IP address, use the ip address dhcp command. A prompt displays to confirm the IP address reconfiguration.
PAGE 280
server are in the same or different subnets. The management default route is deleted if the management IP address is released like other DHCP client management routes. • ip route for 0.0.0.0 takes precedence if it is present or added later. • Management routes added by a DHCP client display with Route Source as DHCP in the show ip management route and show ip management-route dynamic command output.
PAGE 281
• An entry in the DHCP snooping table is not added for a DHCP client interface. DHCP Server A switch can operate as a DHCP client and a DHCP server. DHCP client interfaces cannot acquire a dynamic IP address from the DHCP server running on the switch. Acquire a dynamic IP address from another DHCP server. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Do not enable the DHCP client on an interface and set the priority to 255 or assign the same DHCP interface IP address to a VRRP virtual group.
PAGE 282
route-map map2 permit 20 match source-protocol connected Route Leaking for Complete Routing Table ! ip vrf VRF_1 ip route-import 1:1 ip route-export 2:2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 Route Leaking for Selective Routes ! ip vrf VRF_1 ip route-import 1:1 map1 ip route-export 2:2 map2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 ! ! route-map map1 permit 10 match ip address ip1 ! route-map map2 permit 20 match ip address ip2 ! ip prefix-list ip1 seq 5 permit 20.0.0.
PAGE 283
Configuring DHCP relay source interface The following section explains how to configure global and interface level DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration to forward all the DHCP packets from the DHCP client to DHCP server through the configured source interface. This feature is applicable only for L3 interface with relay configuration and L3 DHCP snooping enabled VLANs.
PAGE 284
{ip | ipv6} dhcp relay source-interface interface Example configuration of interface level DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 interface Following are the steps to configure interface specific source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration for DHCP relay. The below example shows when the DHCP relay uses the interface specific configuration and global source interface configuration depending on the configuration. 1 Configuring L3 interface with IPv4 or IPv6 address.
PAGE 285
Configure the System for User Port Stacking (Option 230) Set the stacking-option variable to provide stack-port detail on the DHCP server when you set the DHCP offer. A stack can be formed when the units are connected. Option 230 is the option for user port stacking. Use it to create up to eight stack groups. Define the configuration parameters on the DHCP server for each chassis based on the chassis MAC address.
PAGE 286
• track the number of address requests per relay agent. Restricting the number of addresses available per relay agent can harden a server against address exhaustion attacks. • associate client MAC addresses with a relay agent to prevent offering an IP address to a client spoofing the same MAC address on a different relay agent. • assign IP addresses according to the relay agent. This prevents generating DHCP offers in response to requests from an unauthorized relay agent.
PAGE 287
the real client’s address. Server-originated packets (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, and DHCPNACK) that arrive on a not trusted port are also dropped. This checkpoint prevents an attacker from acting as an imposter as a DHCP server to facilitate a man-in-the-middle attack. Binding table entries are deleted when a lease expires, or the relay agent encounters a DHCPRELEASE, DHCPNACK, or DHCPDECLINE. DHCP snooping is supported on Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic.
PAGE 288
ip dhcp snooping vlan name Enabling IPv6 DHCP Snooping To enable IPv6 DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1 Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping globally. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 dhcp snooping 2 Specify ports connected to IPv6 DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode ipv6 dhcp snooping trust 3 Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping on a VLAN or range of VLANs.
PAGE 289
Clearing the DHCP IPv6 Binding Table To clear the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding DellEMC# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database Displaying the Contents of the Binding Table To display the contents of the binding table, use the following command. • Display the DHCP snooping information.
PAGE 290
The following example output of the show ip dhcp snooping binding command displays that different IP addresses are mapped to the same MAC address: DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 10.1.1.100 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39735 S Vl 200 Gi 1/4 10.1.1.101 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39736 S Vl 200 Gi 1/4 10.1.1.
PAGE 291
Debugging the IPv6 DHCP To debug the IPv6 DHCP, use the following command. • Display debug information for IPV6 DHCP. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 dhcp IPv6 DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification Configure to enable verify source mac-address in the DHCP packet against the mac address stored in the snooping binding table. • Enable IPV6 DHCP snooping .
PAGE 292
A spoofed ARP message is one in which the MAC address in the sender hardware address field and the IP address in the sender protocol field are strategically chosen by the attacker. For example, in an MITM attack, the attacker sends a client an ARP message containing the attacker’s MAC address and the gateway’s IP address. The client then thinks that the attacker is the gateway, and sends all internet-bound packets to it.
PAGE 293
Configuring dynamic ARP inspection-limit To configure dynamic ARP inspection rate limit on a port, perform the following task. 1 Enter into global configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode configure terminal 2 Select the interface to be configured. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-name 3 Configure ARP packet inspection rate limiting. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode arp inspection-limit {rate pps [interval seconds]} The rate packet per second (pps) range is from 1 to 2048. The default is 15.
PAGE 294
Source Address Validation Using the DHCP binding table, Dell EMC Networking OS can perform three types of source address validation (SAV). Table 18. Three Types of Source Address Validation Source Address Validation Description IP Source Address Validation Prevents IP spoofing by forwarding only IP packets that have been validated against the DHCP binding table.
PAGE 295
DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Dell EMC Networking OS ensures that the packet’s source MAC address is checked against the CHADDR field in the DHCP header only for packets from snooped VLANs. • Enable DHCP MAC SAV.
PAGE 296
Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
PAGE 297
13 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features. To adjust the ExaScale behavior to match TeraScale, use the following command.
PAGE 298
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
PAGE 299
Interface Gi 1/1 Gi 1/1 Line Protocol Up Up Utilization[In Percent] 36 52 Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system.
PAGE 300
• Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles. CONFIGURATION mode link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold {percent} The range is from 1 to 90%. • The default is 60%. Display details for an ECMP group bundle. EXEC mode show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. Viewing an ECMP Group NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network.
PAGE 301
14 FIPS Cryptography Federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce. FIPS mode is also validated for numerous platforms to meet the FIPS-140-2 standard for a software-based cryptographic module. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell EMC Networking platforms.
PAGE 302
Enabling FIPS Mode To enable or disable FIPS mode, use the console port. Secure the host attached to the console port against unauthorized access. Any attempts to enable or disable FIPS mode from a virtual terminal session are denied. When you enable FIPS mode, the following actions are taken: • If enabled, the SSH server is disabled. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, are closed.
PAGE 303
Examples of the show fips status and show system Commands The following example shows the show fips status command. DellEMC#show fips status FIPS Mode : Enabled for the system using the show system command. The following example shows the show system command.
PAGE 304
15 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
PAGE 305
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
PAGE 306
Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch A member VLAN can span two rings interconnected by a common switch, in a figure-eight style topology. A switch can act as a Master node for one FRRP group and a Transit for another FRRP group, or it can be a Transit node for both rings. In the following example, FRRP 101 is a ring with its own Control VLAN, and FRRP 202 has its own Control VLAN running on another ring. A Member VLAN that spans both rings is added as a Member VLAN to both FRRP groups.
PAGE 307
• One Master node per ring — all other nodes are Transit. • Each node has two member interfaces — primary and secondary. • There is no limit to the number of nodes on a ring. • Master node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • Transit node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • STP disabled on ring interfaces. • Master node secondary port is in blocking state during Normal operation.
PAGE 308
Concept Explanation • Hello RHF (HRHF) — These frames are processed only on the Master node’s Secondary port. The Transit nodes pass the HRHF through without processing it. An HRHF is sent at every Hello interval. • Topology Change RHF (TCRHF) — These frames contains ring status, keepalive, and the control and member VLAN hash. The TCRHF is processed at each node of the ring.
PAGE 309
Configuring the Control VLAN Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as control or member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to Layer 2. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports.
PAGE 310
CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
PAGE 311
no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode. timer {hello-interval|dead-interval} milliseconds – Hello-Interval: the range is from 50 to 2000, in increments of 50 (default is 500). – Dead-Interval: the range is from 50 to 6000, in increments of 50 (default is 1500).
PAGE 312
show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only. Spanning Tree (if you enable it globally) must be disabled on both Primary and Secondary interfaces when you enable FRRP.
PAGE 313
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary GigabitEthernet 2/31 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface GigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address ta
PAGE 314
16 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
PAGE 315
• RPM Redundancy Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 33.
PAGE 316
Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP DellEMC(conf)#protocol gvrp DellEMC(config-gvrp)#no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
PAGE 317
Based on the configuration in the following example, the interface is not removed from VLAN 34 or VLAN 35 despite receiving a GVRP Leave message. Additionally, the interface is not dynamically added to VLAN 45 or VLAN 46, even if a GVRP Join message is received.
PAGE 318
• RPM Synchronization 318 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
PAGE 319
17 High Availability (HA) High availability (HA) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. HA is a collection of features that preserves system continuity by maximizing uptime and minimizing packet loss during system disruptions. To support all the features within the HA collection, you should have the latest boot code. The following table lists the boot code requirements as of this Dell EMC Networking OS release. Table 19. Boot Code Requirements Component Boot Code S3124 1 2.0.
PAGE 320
Example of the show redundancy Command DellEMC#show redundancy -- Stack-unit Status ------------------------------------------------Mgmt ID: 1 Stack-unit ID: 12 Stack-unit Redundancy Role: Primary Stack-unit State: Active Stack-unit SW Version: 1-0(0-4679) Link to Peer: Up -- PEER Stack-unit Status ------------------------------------------------Stack-unit State: Standby Peer Stack-unit ID: 5 Stack-unit SW Version: 1-0(0-4679) -- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration ------------------------------------------
PAGE 321
EXEC Privilege mode redundancy force-failover stack-unit Example of the redundancy force-failover stack-unit Command Dell#redundancy force-failover stack-unit System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: yes Proceed with Stack-unit hot failover [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell# Disabling Auto-Reboot To disable auto-reboot, use the following command. • Prevent a failed stack unit from rebooting after a failover.
PAGE 322
• To remove a logical stack-unit configuration, use the following command: CONFIGURATION mode no stack-unit unit_id provision Hitless Behavior Hitless is a protocol-based system behavior that makes a stack unit failover on the local system transparent to remote systems. The system synchronizes protocol information on the Management and Standby stack units such that, in the event of a stack unit failover, it is not necessary to notify the remote systems of a local state change.
PAGE 323
System Health Monitoring Dell EMC Networking OS also monitors the overall health of the system. Key parameters such as CPU utilization, free memory, and error counters (for example, CRC failures and packet loss) are measured, and after exceeding a threshold can be used to initiate recovery mechanism. Failure and Event Logging Dell EMC Networking systems provide multiple options for logging failures and events. Trace Log Developers interlace messages with software code to track the execution of a program.
PAGE 324
Hot-Lock Behavior Dell EMC Networking OS hot-lock features allow you to append and delete their corresponding content addressable memory (CAM) entries dynamically without disrupting traffic. Existing entries are simply shuffled to accommodate new entries. Hot-Lock IP ACLs allows you to append rules to and delete rules from an access control list (ACL) that is already written to CAM. This behavior is enabled by default and is available for both standard and extended ACLs on ingress and egress.
PAGE 325
18 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
PAGE 326
leaves a multicast group by sending an IGMP message to its IGMP Querier. The querier is the router that surveys a subnet for multicast receivers and processes survey responses to populate the multicast routing table. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 34.
PAGE 327
3 Any remaining hosts respond to the query according to the delay timer mechanism (refer to Adjusting Query and Response Timers). If no hosts respond (because there are none remaining in the group), the querier waits a specified period and sends another query. If it still receives no response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2.
PAGE 328
Figure 36. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1 The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2 The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
PAGE 329
Figure 37. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1 Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
PAGE 330
Figure 38. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2 Enable a multicast routing protocol.
PAGE 331
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled IPv4 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode • show ip igmp interface View IGMP-enabled IPv6 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 mld interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command DellEMC#show ip igmp interface GigabitEthernet 3/10 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
PAGE 332
Internet address is 1.1.1.1/24 IGMP is enabled on interface IGMP query interval is 60 seconds IGMP querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP immediate-leave is disabled IGMP activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves, 0 channel joins, 0 channel leaves IGMP querying router is 1.1.1.1 (this system) IGMP version is 3 Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command.
PAGE 333
When the querier receives a leave message from a host, it sends a group-specific query to the subnet. If no response is received, it sends another. The amount of time that the querier waits to receive a response to the initial query before sending a second one is the last member query interval (LMQI). The switch waits one LMQI after the second query before removing the group from the state table. • Adjust the period between queries.
PAGE 334
Figure 39. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 20. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 335
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 336
Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet. IGMP immediate leave reduces leave latency by enabling a router to immediately delete the group membership on an interface after receiving a Leave message (it does not send any group-specific or group-and-source queries before deleting the entry).
PAGE 337
• View the configuration. CONFIGURATION mode show running-config • Disable snooping on a VLAN.
PAGE 338
no ip igmp snooping flood Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router To statically specify or view a port in a VLAN, use the following commands. • Statically specify a port in a VLAN as connected to a multicast router. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip igmp snooping mrouter • View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command.
PAGE 339
Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
PAGE 340
Table 21.
PAGE 341
When the feature is enabled using the management egress-interface-selection command, the following events are performed: • The CLI prompt changes to the EIS mode. • In this mode, you can run the application and no application commands • Applications can be configured or unconfigured as management applications using the application or no application command. All configured applications are considered as management applications and the rest of them as non-management applications.
PAGE 342
Handling of Switch-Initiated Traffic When the control processor (CP) initiates a control packet, the following processing occurs: • TCP/UDP port number is extracted from the sockaddr structure in the in_selectsrc call which is called as part of the connect system call or in the ip_output function.
PAGE 343
• If route lookup in the EIS routing table fails or if the management port is down, then packets are dropped. The management application drop counter is incremented. • Whenever IP address is assigned to the management port, it is stored in a global variable in the IP stack, which is used for comparison with the source IP address of the packet. • Rest of the response traffic is handled as per existing behavior by doing route lookup in the default routing table.
PAGE 344
Traffic type / Application type Switch initiated traffic Switch-destined traffic only. No change in the existing behavior.
PAGE 345
Table 23.
PAGE 346
Table 24.
PAGE 347
• Designate an interface as a multicast router interface.
PAGE 348
19 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 1 Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 349
• Management Interfaces • VLAN Interfaces • Loopback Interfaces • Null Interfaces • Port Channel Interfaces • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Link Dampening • Link Bundle Monitoring • Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control • Configure the MTU Size on an Interface • Port-Pipes • Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces • Provisioning Combo Ports • View Advanced Interface Information • Configuring the Traffic
PAGE 350
View Basic Interface Information To view basic interface information, use the following command. You have several options for viewing interface status and configuration parameters. • Lists all configurable interfaces on the chassis. EXEC mode show interfaces This command has options to display the interface status, IP and MAC addresses, and multiple counters for the amount and type of traffic passing through the interface.
PAGE 351
GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet 1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 1/5 1/6 1/7 1/8 1/9 unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned 10.10.10.
PAGE 352
Enabling Energy Efficient Ethernet Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) is an IEEE 802.3 az standard that reduces power consumptions on Ethernet ports. EEE stops the transmission when there is no data to be transmitted and resumes the transmission at the arrival of new packets. You can enable EEE only on one Gigabit and ten Gigabit native or optional module copper ports. 1 To enable EEE, use the eee command.
PAGE 353
show hardware counters interface-type slot/port show hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number unit unit-number counters Examples of the show Commands The following example shows the status information for all the interfaces.
PAGE 354
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - 354 Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame C
PAGE 355
TX - RUNT Frame Counter TX - Fragment Counter TX - PFC Frame Priority 0 TX - PFC Frame Priority 1 TX - PFC Frame Priority 2 TX - PFC Frame Priority 3 TX - PFC Frame Priority 4 TX - PFC Frame Priority 5 TX - PFC Frame Priority 6 TX - PFC Frame Priority 7 TX - Debug Counter 0 TX - Debug Counter 1 TX - Debug Counter 2 TX - Debug Counter 3 TX - Debug Counter 4 TX - Debug Counter 5 TX - Debug Counter 6 TX - Debug Counter 7 TX - Debug Counter 8 TX - Debug Counter 9 TX - Debug Counter 10 TX - Debug Counter 11 TX -
PAGE 356
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - PFC Frame Priority 5 PFC Frame Priority 6 PFC Frame Priority 7 Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 EEE LPI Event Counter EEE LPI Duration Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame C
PAGE 357
EXEC Privilege mode • clear counters eee Clear the EEE counters on the specified port. EXEC Privilege mode • clear counters interface-type slot/port eee Clear the EEE counters on the specified range of ports. EXEC Privilege mode clear counters interface-type slot/port-range eee Examples of the clear counters eee Command When you use this command, confirm that you want Dell EMC Networking OS to clear the EEE counters.
PAGE 358
Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces By default, all interfaces are operationally disabled and traffic does not pass through them.
PAGE 359
Example of a Basic Layer 2 Interface Configuration DellEMC(conf-if)#show config ! interface Port-channel 1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if)# Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode.
PAGE 360
To determine the configuration of an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or the various show interface commands in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode To assign an IP address, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx).
PAGE 361
Dell EMC Networking OS generates syslog message for Err-disabled recovery when: • The timer is started for recovery of an interface • The recovery action is complete Following is the sample syslog displayed when the timer for Err-disable recovery is started: May 8 17:18:57 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %IFMGR-5-ERR_DIS_RECOVERY_TIMER_START: 180 seconds timer started to attempt recovery of interface Gi 2/18 from error disabled state caused by bpdu-guard.
PAGE 362
When you enable this feature, all management routes (connected, static, and default) are copied to the management EIS routing table. Use the management route command to add new management routes to the default and EIS routing tables. Use the show ip management-eis-route command to view the EIS routes. Important Points to Remember • • • • Deleting a management route removes the route from both the EIS routing table and the default routing table.
PAGE 363
• Configure an IP address and mask on a Management interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask – ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in /prefix format (/x). Viewing Two Global IPv6 Addresses Important Points to Remember — virtual-ip You can configure two global IPv6 addresses on the system in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the addresses, use the show interface managementethernet command, as shown in the following example.
PAGE 364
• A duplicate IP address message is printed for the management port’s virtual IP address on an RPM failover. This behavior is a harmless error that is generated due to a brief transitory moment during failover when both RPMs’ management ports own the virtual IP address, but have different MAC addresses. • The primary management interface uses only the virtual IP address if it is configured. The system cannot be accessed through the native IP address of the primary RPM’s management interface.
PAGE 365
• Configure an IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] – ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). – secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Example of a Configuration for a VLAN Participating in an OSPF Process interface Vlan 10 ip address 1.1.1.
PAGE 366
Port Channel Interfaces Port channel interfaces support link aggregation, as described in IEEE Standard 802.3ad. This section covers the following topics: • • • • Port Channel Definition and Standards Port Channel Benefits Port Channel Implementation Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.
PAGE 367
sets. That first interface may be either the interface that is physically brought up first or was physically operating when interfaces were added to the port channel. For example, if the first operational interface in the port channel is a Tengigabit Ethernet interface, all interfaces at 10000 Mbps are kept up, and all other interfaces that are not set to 10G speed or auto negotiate are disabled.
PAGE 368
no shutdown After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode. To place the port channel in Layer 2 mode or configure an IP address to place the port channel in Layer 3 mode, use the switchport command. You can configure a port channel as you would a physical interface by enabling or configuring protocols or assigning access control lists.
PAGE 369
The following example shows the port channel’s mode (L2 for Layer 2 and L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2-port channel assigned to a routed VLAN), the status, and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel. DellEMC>show interface port-channel 20 Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa Internet address is 1.1.120.
PAGE 370
no channel-member interface 2 Change to the second port channel INTERFACE mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode interface port-channel id number 3 Add the interface to the second port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface Example of Moving an Interface to a New Port Channel The following example shows moving an interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3.
PAGE 371
tagged port-channel id number • An interface with tagging enabled can belong to multiple VLANs. Add the port channel to the VLAN as an untagged interface. INTERFACE VLAN mode untagged port-channel id number • An interface without tagging enabled can belong to only one VLAN. Remove the port channel with tagging enabled from the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no tagged port-channel id number or no untagged port-channel id number • Identify which port channels are members of VLANs.
PAGE 372
Assigning an IP Address to a Port Channel You can assign an IP address to a port channel and use port channels in Layer 3 routing protocols. To assign an IP address, use the following command. • Configure an IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] – ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). – secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address.
PAGE 373
CONFIGURATION mode [no] load-balance {ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip]} | {mac [dest-mac | source-dest-mac | source-mac]} | {tcp-udp enable} {ipv6-selection} {tunnel}| {ingress-port} You can select one, two, or all three of the following basic hash methods: – ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip] — Distribute IP traffic based on the IP destination or source address.
PAGE 374
The hash-algorithm command is specific to ECMP group. The default ECMP hash configuration is crc-lower. This command takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port.
PAGE 375
Bulk Configuration Examples Use the interface range command for bulk configuration. • Create a Single-Range • Create a Multiple-Range • Exclude Duplicate Entries • Exclude a Smaller Port Range • Overlap Port Ranges • Commas • Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
PAGE 376
Overlap Port Ranges The following is an example showing how the interface-range prompt extends a port range from the smallest start port number to the largest end port number when port ranges overlap. handles overlapping port ranges.
PAGE 377
interface range macro name Example of Using a Macro to Change the Interface Range Configuration Mode The following example shows how to change to the interface-range configuration mode using the interface-range macro named “test.” DellEMC(config)# interface range macro test DellEMC(config-if)# Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Monitor interface statistics with the monitor interface command.
PAGE 378
T - Increase refresh interval q - Quit t - Decrease refresh interval q DellEMC# Maintenance Using TDR The time domain reflectometer (TDR) is supported on all Dell EMC Networking switches. TDR is an assistance tool to resolve link issues that helps detect obvious open or short conditions within any of the four copper pairs. TDR sends a signal onto the physical cable and examines the reflection of the signal that returns.
PAGE 379
• half-life— The accumulated penalty decays exponentially based on the half-life period. The accumulated penalty decreases half after each half-life period. The range of half-life is from 1 to 30 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. • reuse-threshold— After exponential decay, the penalty reaches the default or configured reuse threshold. The interface is unsuppressed and the state changes to “up”. The range of reuse threshold is from 1 to 20000. The default is 750.
PAGE 380
Figure 40. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example.
PAGE 381
accumulated. When the accumulated penalty exceeds the configured suppress threshold (2400), the interface state is set to Error-Disabled state. After the flap (flap 3), the interface flap stops. Then, the accumulated penalty decays exponentially and when it reaches below the set reuse threshold (300), the interface is unsuppressed and the interface state changes to “up” state. Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. • Enable link dampening.
PAGE 382
Link Dampening Support for XML View the output of the following show commands in XML by adding | display xml to the end of the command. • show interfaces dampening • show interfaces dampening summary • show interfaces interface slot/port Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The following table lists the range for each transmission media.
PAGE 383
Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Ethernet pause frames and threshold settings are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Ethernet Pause Frames allow for a temporary stop in data transmission. A situation may arise where a sending device may transmit data faster than a destination device can accept it. The destination sends a PAUSE frame back to the source, stopping the sender’s transmission for a period of time.
PAGE 384
INTERFACE mode flowcontrol {rx [off | on] tx [off | on] [negotiate] } – rx on: enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. – rx off: enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port. – tx on: enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
PAGE 385
Port-Pipes A port pipe is a Dell EMC Networking-specific term for the hardware packet-processing elements that handle network traffic to and from a set of front-end I/O ports. The physical, front-end I/O ports are referred to as a port-set. In the command-line interface, a port pipe is entered as port-set port-pipe-number. Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces By default, auto-negotiation of speed and full duplex mode is enabled on 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 386
6 Disable auto-negotiation on the port. INTERFACE mode no negotiation auto If the speed was set to 1000, do not disable auto-negotiation. 7 Verify configuration changes. INTERFACE mode show config Example of the show interfaces status Command to View Link Status NOTE: The show interfaces status command displays link status, but not administrative status. For both link and administrative status, use the show ip interface command.
PAGE 387
interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address speed 100 duplex full no shutdown Set Auto-Negotiation Options The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master/ forced slave once autonegotiation is enabled. CAUTION: Ensure that only one end of the node is configured as forced-master and the other is configured as forced-slave.
PAGE 388
Provisioning Combo Ports The device has two combo ports of 1G SFP. By default, the combo ports are in Hybrid mode. You can provision the combo ports to act as a copper or fiber medium. The speed and negotiation auto commands are not available on the combo ports in the Hybrid mode. To apply these commands on combo ports, provision the ports as individual medium. You can use the combo-port-type command to provision the combo ports as copper or fiber medium.
PAGE 389
Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: GigabitEthernet 3/2 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: GigabitEthernet 3/3 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: GigabitEthernet 3/4 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 --More-- Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds.
PAGE 390
DellEMC#show interfaces GigabitEthernet 1/1 is down, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:01:9e:d9 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1d23h45m Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Rece
PAGE 391
3106 packets, 226755 bytes 133 64-byte pkts, 2973 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 3106 packets, 226755 bytes, 0 underruns 133 64-byte pkts, 2973 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 disc
PAGE 392
• Egress ACLs • ILM • IP FLOW • IP ACL • IP FIB • L2 ACL • L2 FIB Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command. This command does not clear the counters any SNMP program captures. To clear the counters, use the following the command. • Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and physical interfaces or selected ones.
PAGE 393
20 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and FTP protocols. It supports two operational modes: Transport and Tunnel. • Transport mode — (default) Use to encrypt only the payload of the packet. Routing information is unchanged.
PAGE 394
transform-set myXform-set session-key inbound esp 256 auth encrypt session-key outbound esp 257 auth encrypt match 0 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 23 match 1 tcp a::1 /128 23 a::2 /128 0 match 2 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 21 match 3 tcp a::1 /128 21 a::2 /128 0 match 4 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 match 5 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 23 1.1.1.2 /32 0 match 6 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 7 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.2 /32 0 3 Apply the crypto policy to management traffic.
PAGE 395
21 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 396
• Configuring a Broadcast Address • Configurations Using UDP Helper • UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses • UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses • Troubleshooting UDP Helper IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks.
PAGE 397
2 • For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 398
– name: enter the keyword name and the description of the IPv4 static route configuration. (optional) – permanent: keep the static route in the routing table (if you use the interface option) even if you disable the interface with the route. (optional) – tag tag-value: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. (optional) Example of the show ip route static Command To view the configured routes, use the show ip route static command. DellEMC#show ip route static Destination Gateway ----------------S 2.1.2.
PAGE 399
ipv6_link_going_to_europe_centre DellEMC(conf)# ip route 19.1.1.0/24 19.1.1.1 name This_link_goes_to_London_Central To view the description for the IPv4 or IPv6 static routes, use the show running-config static command. Following is the sample show running-config static output: DellEMC#show running-config static ! ipv6 route 1::/32 GigabitEthernet 2/3 11::1 name Stack-2 ipv6 route 2::/32 GigabitEthernet 2/48 11::1 name Stack-2 ip route 2.2.2.
PAGE 400
without fragmentation. If the ICMP message from the receiving device, which is sent to the originating device, contains the next-hop MTU, then the sending device lowers the packet size accordingly and resends the packet. Otherwise, the iterative method is followed until the packet can traverse without being fragmented. To use the PMTD in the physical interface, you must allocate and activate the fedgov CAM ACL space using the cam-acl command.
PAGE 401
Configuring the Duration to Establish a TCP Connection You can configure the duration for which the device must wait before it attempts to establish a TCP connection. Using this capability, you can limit the wait times for TCP connection requests.
PAGE 402
The following sections describe DNS and the resolution of host names. • Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names • Specifying the Local System Domain and a List of Domains • Configuring DNS with Traceroute Name server, Domain name, and Domain list are VRF specific. The maximum number of Name servers and Domain lists per VRF is six. Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands.
PAGE 403
ip domain-list name Configure this command up to six times to specify a list of possible domain names. Dell EMC Networking OS searches the domain names in the order they were configured until a match is found or the list is exhausted. Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup • Specify up to six name servers.
PAGE 404
For more information about Proxy ARP, refer to RFC 925, Multi-LAN Address Resolution, and RFC 1027, Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways. Configuration Tasks for ARP For a complete listing of all ARP-related commands, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 405
Clearing ARP Cache To clear the ARP cache of dynamically learnt ARP information, use the following command. • Clear the ARP caches for all interfaces or for a specific interface by entering the following information. EXEC privilege clear arp-cache [interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh] – ip ip-address (OPTIONAL): enter the keyword ip then the IP address of the ARP entry you wish to clear. – no-refresh (OPTIONAL): enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM.
PAGE 406
Figure 41. ARP Learning via ARP Request Beginning with Dell EMC Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, when you enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system installs a new ARP entry, or updates an existing entry for all received ARP requests. Figure 42. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP.
PAGE 407
CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP. EXEC Privilege mode show arp retries ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply). ICMP error messages inform the router of problems in a particular packet.
PAGE 408
Figure 43. ICMP Redirect Host H is connected to the same Ethernet segment as SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 are multi-layer switches which can route packets. The default gateway of Host H is configured as SW1. Although the best route to the remote branch office host may be through SW2, Host H sends a packet destined for Host R to its default gateway — SW1.
PAGE 409
Important Points to Remember • The existing ip directed broadcast command is rendered meaningless if you enable UDP helper on the same interface. • The broadcast traffic rate should not exceed 200 packets per second when you enable UDP helper. • You may specify a maximum of 16 UDP ports.
PAGE 410
Internet address is 1.1.0.1/24 IP UDP-Broadcast address is 1.1.255.
PAGE 411
Figure 44. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
PAGE 412
Figure 46. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. • If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. • If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
PAGE 413
22 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
PAGE 414
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
PAGE 415
• Flow Label (20 bits) • Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
PAGE 416
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
PAGE 417
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
PAGE 418
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
PAGE 419
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
PAGE 420
Feature and Functionality Dell EMC Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location S3100 series IS-IS for IPv6 support for redistribution 9.7.(0.1) Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance 9.7.(0.1) OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 9.7.(0.1) Equal Cost Multipath for IPv6 9.7.(0.
PAGE 421
• Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. • Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
PAGE 422
NOTE: To avoid problems with network discovery, Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring the static route last or assigning an IPv6 address to the interface and assigning an address to the peer (the forwarding router’s address) less than 10 seconds apart. With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes.
PAGE 423
lifetime to use the RDNSS address does not expire. A value of 0 indicates to the host that the RDNSS address should not be used. You must specify a lifetime using the lifetime or infinite parameter. The DNS server address does not allow the following: • link local addresses • loopback addresses • prefix addresses • multicast addresses • invalid host addresses If you specify this information in the IPv6 RDNSS configuration, a DNS error is displayed.
PAGE 424
Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information To display IPv6 interface information, including IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show ipv6 interface command in EXEC or EXEC Privilege mode. Examples of Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information The following example displays IPv6 RDNSS information. The output in the last 3 lines indicates that the IPv6 RDNSS was correctly configured on interface te 1/1.
PAGE 425
Configuration Tasks for IPv6 The following are configuration tasks for the IPv6 protocol. • Adjusting Your CAM-Profile • Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface • Assigning a Static IPv6 Route • Configuring Telnet with IPv6 • SNMP over IPv6 • Showing IPv6 Information • Clearing IPv6 Routes Adjusting Your CAM-Profile Although adjusting your CAM-profile is not a mandatory step, if you plan to implement IPv6 ACLs, adjust your CAM settings. The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks.
PAGE 426
The total number of groups is 4. Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface Essentially, IPv6 is enabled in Dell EMC Networking OS simply by assigning IPv6 addresses to individual router interfaces. You can use IPv6 and IPv4 together on a system, but be sure to differentiate that usage carefully. To assign an IPv6 address to an interface, use the ipv6 address command.
PAGE 427
– For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. – For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Configuring Telnet with IPv6 The Telnet client and server in Dell EMC Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router. NOTE: Telnet to link local addresses is supported on the system.
PAGE 428
ospf pim prefix-list route rpf DellEMC# OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
PAGE 429
• Show IPv6 routing information for the specified route type. EXEC mode show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] type The following keywords are available: – To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). – To display information about a host, enter hostname. – To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all. – To display information about all connected IPv6 routes, enter connected.
PAGE 430
S 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222::/96 [1/0] via 2222:2222:3333:3333::1, Gi 9/1, 00:03:16 9999:9999:9999:9999::/64 [1/0] via 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222:3333:4444, 00:03:16 S Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface To view the configuration for any interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
PAGE 431
• To reenable the ND timer, use the no form of the command: INTERFACE no ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer The following example shows how to disable the ND timer. DellEMC(conf-if-fo-1/1/1)#ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer Configuring IPv6 RA Guard The IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard allows you to block or reject the unwanted router advertisement guard messages that arrive at the network device platform.
PAGE 432
POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode router-preference maximum {high | low | medium} 10 Set the router lifetime. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode router—lifetime value The router lifetime range is from 0 to 9,000 seconds. 11 Apply the policy to trusted ports. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode trusted-port 12 Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) value. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode mtu value 13 Set the advertised reachability time.
PAGE 433
interface interface-type slot/port 2 Apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 nd ra-guard attach policy policy-name [vlan [vlan 1, vland 2, vlan 3.....]] 3 Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name The policy name string can be up to 140 characters.
PAGE 434
23 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 435
NOTE: After a switch is reloaded, powercycled, or upgraded, any information exchanged during the initial handshake is not available. If the switch establishes communication after reloading, it detects that a session was in progress but could not obtain complete information for it. Any incomplete information is not available in the show commands.
PAGE 436
Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 437
NOTE: If you are using EqualLogic or Compellent storage arrays, more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions are possible. However, iSCSI session monitoring is not capable of monitoring more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions. If this number is exceeded, sessions may display as unknown in session monitoring output. Dell EMC Networking recommends that you disable iSCSI session monitoring for EqualLogic and Compellent storage arrays or for installations with more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions.
PAGE 438
• Jumbo frame size is set to the maximum for all interfaces on all ports and port-channels, if it is not already enabled. • Spanning-tree portfast is enabled on the interface. • Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface. Enter the iscsi profile-compellent command in INTERFACE Configuration mode. Synchronizing iSCSI Sessions Learned on VLT-Lags with VLTPeer The following behavior occurs during synchronization of iSCSI sessions.
PAGE 439
Default iSCSI Optimization Values The following table lists the default values for the iSCSI optimization feature. Table 30. iSCSI Optimization Defaults Parameter Default Value iSCSI Optimization global setting Disabled on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, and S3100 series. iSCSI CoS mode (802.1p priority queue mapping) dot1p priority 4 without the remark setting when you enable iSCSI. If you do not enable iSCSI, this feature is disabled.
PAGE 440
NOTE: Content addressable memory (CAM) allocation is optional. If CAM is not allocated, the following features are disabled: • session monitoring • aging • class of service You can enable iSCSI even when allocated with zero (0) CAM blocks. However, if no CAM blocks are allocated, session monitoring is disabled and this information the show iscsi command displays this information. 2 Enable iSCSI. CONFIGURATION mode iscsi enable 3 For a DCB environment: Configure DCB and iSCSI.
PAGE 441
• dot1p vlan-priority-value: specifies the virtual local area network (VLAN) priority tag assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 7. The default is: the dot1p value in ingress iSCSI frames is not changed and the same priority is used in iSCSI TLV advertisements if you do not enter the iscsi priority-bits command (Step 10). • dscp dscp-value: specifies the DSCP value assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 442
The following example shows the show iscsi session command. VLT PEER1 DellEMC#show iscsi session Session 0: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg ISID: 400001370000 VLT PEER2 Session 0: -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.
PAGE 443
24 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
PAGE 444
• area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.0001) are the area address. The system portion is 000c.000a.4321 and the last byte is always 0. Figure 51.
PAGE 445
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
PAGE 446
IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs. The new TLVs use the extended metrics and up/down bit semantics. Multi-topology IS-IS adds TLVs: • MT TLV — contains one or more Multi-Topology IDs in which the router participates. This TLV is included in IIH and the first fragment of an LSP. • MT Intermediate Systems TLV — appears for every topology a node supports.
PAGE 447
Configuration Tasks for IS-IS The following describes the configuration tasks for IS-IS. • Enabling IS-IS • Configure Multi-Topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) • Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart • Changing LSP Attributes • Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style • Configuring IS-IS Cost • Changing the IS-Type • Controlling Routing Updates • Configuring Authentication Passwords • Setting the Overload Bit • Debugging IS-IS Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled.
PAGE 448
4 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface.
PAGE 449
Accept wide metrics: DellEMC# none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 450
4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
PAGE 451
– adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. – manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Examples of the show isis graceful-restart detail Command NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
PAGE 452
LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 DellEMC# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary.
PAGE 453
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
PAGE 454
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: DellEMC# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
PAGE 455
Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
PAGE 456
– For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell EMC Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table. The prefix lists are globally applied on all interfaces running IS-IS.
PAGE 457
• Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes. ROUTER ISIS-AF IPV6 mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] Enter the type of interface and the interface information: – For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 458
ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – process-id the range is from 1 to 65535. – level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. – metric value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. – match external the range is from 1 or 2.
PAGE 459
Configuring Authentication Passwords You can assign an authentication password for routers in Level 1 and for routers in Level 2. Because Level 1 and Level 2 routers do not communicate with each other, you can assign different passwords for Level 1 routers and for Level 2 routers. However, if you want the routers in the level to communicate with each other, configure them with the same password. To configure a simple text password, use the following commands.
PAGE 460
eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.00-00 0x00000002 0xD1A7 IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000006 0xC38A eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000E 0x53BF eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
PAGE 461
To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command. For example, to disable debugging of IS-IS updates, use the no debug isis updates-packets command. To disable all IS-IS debugging, use the no debug isis command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. IS-IS Metric Styles The following sections provide additional information about the IS-IS metric styles.
PAGE 462
Table 33. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only). The original isis metric value is displayed in the show config and show running-config commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style.
PAGE 463
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style. Moving to transition and then to another metric style produces different results. Table 34.
PAGE 464
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition narrow truncated value wide transition narrow transition truncated value wide transition transition truncated value Sample Configurations The following configurations are examples for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations.
PAGE 465
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-3/17)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.1/24 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ip router isis ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-3/17)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis metric-style wide level-1 metric-style wide level-2 net 34.
PAGE 466
25 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
PAGE 467
LACP Modes Dell EMC Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. • Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
PAGE 468
The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following configuration tasks apply to LACP. • Creating a LAG • Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic • Setting the LACP Long Timeout • Monitoring and Debugging LACP • Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
PAGE 469
DellEMC(conf)#interface Gigabitethernet 4/15 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-4/15)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-4/15)#port-channel-protocol lacp DellEMC(conf-if-gi-4/15-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
PAGE 470
• Debug LACP, including configuration and events. EXEC mode [no] debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]] Shared LAG State Tracking Shared LAG state tracking provides the flexibility to bring down a port channel (LAG) based on the operational state of another LAG. At any time, only two LAGs can be a part of a group such that the fate (status) of one LAG depends on the other LAG.
PAGE 471
Example of LAGs in the Same Failover Group DellEMC#config DellEMC(conf)#port-channel failover-group DellEMC(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 To view the failover group configuration, use the show running-configuration po-failover-group command. DellEMC#show running-config po-failover-group ! port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group.
PAGE 472
Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking The following is more information about shared LAG state tracking. • • • • • This feature is available for static and dynamic LAGs. Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state.
PAGE 473
Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts,
PAGE 474
Figure 56.
PAGE 475
Figure 57.
PAGE 476
Figure 58.
PAGE 477
Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int gig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(con
PAGE 478
Figure 59.
PAGE 479
Figure 60.
PAGE 480
Figure 61. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
PAGE 481
26 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
PAGE 482
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
PAGE 483
In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session. NOTE: The CAM-check failure message beginning in Dell EMC Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 is different from versions 8.2.1.
PAGE 484
converted to sticky MACs on that interface. To remove all sticky MAC addresses from the running config file, disable sticky MAC and use the write config command. When you enable sticky mac on an interface, dynamically-learned MAC addresses do not age, even if you enabled mac-learninglimit dynamic. If you configured mac-learning-limit and mac-learning-limit dynamic and you disabled sticky MAC, any dynamically-learned MAC addresses ages.
PAGE 485
learn-limit-violation shutdown Setting Station Move Violation Actions no-station-move is the default behavior. You can configure the system to take an action if a station move occurs using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command. To display a list of interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation actions, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message indicating a station move.
PAGE 486
Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses from LACP and LLDP BPDUs. To disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs, follow this procedure: • Disable source MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table disable-learning lacp • Disable source MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table disable-learning lldp • Disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs.
PAGE 487
Figure 62. Redundant NICs with NIC Teaming When you use NIC teaming, consider that the server MAC address is originally learned on Port 0/1 of the switch (shown in the following) and Port 0/5 is the failover port. When the NIC fails, the system automatically sends an ARP request for the gateway or host NIC to resolve the ARP and refresh the egress interface.
PAGE 488
following illustration). The redundant pairs feature allows you to create redundant links in networks that do not use STP by configuring backup interfaces for the interfaces on either side of the primary link. NOTE: For more information about STP, refer to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Assign a backup interface to an interface using the switchport backup command. The backup interface remains in a Down state until the primary fails, at which point it transitions to Up state.
PAGE 489
To ensure that existing network applications see no difference when a primary interface in a redundant pair transitions to the backup interface, be sure to apply identical configurations of other traffic parameters to each interface. If you remove an interface in a redundant link (remove the line card of a physical interface or delete a port channel with the no interface port-channel command), the redundant pair configuration is also removed.
PAGE 490
1 L2 up 00:08:33 Gi 1/1 (Up) 2 L2 up 00:00:02 Gi 2/1 (Up) DellEMC#configure DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface port-channel 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN: Do not run any Layer2 protocols on Po 1 and Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: Po 2 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# DellEMC# DellEMC#show
PAGE 491
In the event of a far-end failure, the device stops receiving frames and, after the specified time interval, assumes that the far-end is not available. The connecting line protocol is brought down so that upper layer protocols can detect the neighbor unavailability faster. FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive.
PAGE 492
Configuring FEFD You can configure FEFD for all interfaces from CONFIGURATION mode, or on individual interfaces from INTERFACE mode. To enable FEFD globally on all interfaces, use the following command. • Enable FEFD globally on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
PAGE 493
fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] • Disable FEFD protocol on one interface. INTERFACE mode fefd disable Disabling an interface shuts down all protocols working on that interface’s connected line. It does not delete your previous FEFD configuration which you can enable again at any time. To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
PAGE 494
2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 2w1d22h : FEFD state on Gi 4/1 changed from Bi-directional to Unknown DellEMC#debug fefd packets DellEMC#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Gi 1/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 1/1) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 4/1) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Gi 4/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender
PAGE 495
27 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
PAGE 496
Table 37. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of a LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
PAGE 497
Figure 68. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell EMC Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 38. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
PAGE 498
Type TLV Description in the Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of LLDP, but is available and mandatory (non-configurable) in the LLDPMED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell EMC Networking supports the LLDPMED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell EMC Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only.
PAGE 499
Table 39. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs Type SubType TLV Description 127 1 LLDP-MED Capabilities Indicates: • • • whether the transmitting device supports LLDP-MED what LLDP-MED TLVs it supports LLDP device class 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value.
PAGE 500
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV. • • The value of the LLDP-MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2–octet bitmap, each bit represents an LLDP-MED capability (as shown in the following table). The possible values of the LLDP-MED device type are shown in the following.
PAGE 501
• VLAN ID • VLAN tagged or untagged status • Layer 2 priority • DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined. An individual LLDP-MED network policy TLV is generated for each application type that you specify with the Dell EMC Networking OS CLI (Advertising TLVs).
PAGE 502
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell EMC Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
PAGE 503
• LLDP is not hitless. LLDP Compatibility • Spanning tree and force10 ring protocol “blocked” ports allow LLDPDUs. • 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. • Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
PAGE 504
Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2 Enter LLDP management-interface mode.
PAGE 505
To advertise TLVs, use the following commands. 1 Enter LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Advertise one or more TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise { dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. • For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. • For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id vlan-name. • For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
PAGE 506
Storing and Viewing Unrecognized LLDP TLVs Dell EMC Networking OS provides support to store unrecognized (reserved and organizational specific) LLDP TLVs. Also, support is extended to retrieve the stored unrecognized TLVs using SNMP. When the incoming TLV from LLDP neighbors is not recognized, the TLV is categorized as unrecognized TLV.
PAGE 507
Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config Examples of Viewing LLDP Configurations The following example shows viewing an LLDP global configuration.
PAGE 508
Example of Viewing Detailed Information Advertised by Neighbors DellEMC(conf)#do show lldp neighbors detail ======================================================================== Local Interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 has 2 neighbors Total Frames Out: 3 Total Frames In: 8 Total Neighbor information Age outs: 0 Total Multiple Neighbors Detected: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 960 Total TLVs Discarded: 16 Next packet will be sent after 9 seconds The neighbors are
PAGE 509
Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1 Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 201 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:39 UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),121, 4) ((00-01-66),120, 4) ((00-01-66),119, --------------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 4c:76:25:f4:ab:02 Remote Por
PAGE 510
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring LLDP Notification Interval This implementation has been introduced to adhere to the IEEE 802.1AB standard. This implementation allows a user to configure the LLDP notification interval between 5 (default) and 3600 seconds. NOTE: Before implementation of this feature, notification messages were not throttled.
PAGE 511
advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description mode tx no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no mode R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring the Time to Live Value The information received from a neighbor expires after a specific amount of time (measured in seconds) called a time to live (TTL).
PAGE 512
debug lldp brief • View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU, including unrecognized TLVs. debug lldp detail To stop viewing the LLDP TLVs sent and received by the system, use the no debug lldp command. Figure 73.
PAGE 513
Relevant Management Objects Dell EMC Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: • received and transmitted TLVs • the LLDP configuration on the local agent • IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs • received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 43.
PAGE 514
Table 44.
PAGE 515
Table 45. LLDP 802.
PAGE 516
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable Tagged Flag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP Value 3 Location Identifier Location Data Format Location ID Data 4 Extended Power via MDI Power Device Type Power Source System LLDP-MED MIB Object Remote lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyUn known Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyTa gged Remote lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyTa gged Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyVl anID Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyV lanID Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyPri ority Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyP riority
PAGE 517
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werPriority lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erPriority Power Value Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPort PowerAv lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rReq Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werAv lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erReq Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 517
PAGE 518
28 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
PAGE 519
With Multicast NLB mode, the data forwards to all the servers based on the port specified using the following Layer 2 multicast command in CONFIGURATION MODE: mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
PAGE 520
CONFIGURATION mode ip vlan-flooding There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
PAGE 521
29 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
PAGE 522
RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 75.
PAGE 523
active sources in the area of the other RPs. If any of the RPs fail, IP routing converges and one of the RPs becomes the active RP in more than one area. New sources register with the backup RP. Receivers join toward the new RP and connectivity is maintained. Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process.
PAGE 524
Figure 76.
PAGE 525
Figure 77.
PAGE 526
Figure 78.
PAGE 527
Figure 79. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 528
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
PAGE 529
show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in Dell EMC Networking OS are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries. Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. • Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group.
PAGE 530
Figure 80.
PAGE 531
Figure 81.
PAGE 532
Figure 82. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
PAGE 533
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 DellEMC#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.
PAGE 534
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
PAGE 535
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
PAGE 536
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
PAGE 537
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
PAGE 538
Figure 83. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
PAGE 539
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
PAGE 540
interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 541
The following example shows an R3 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface GigabitEthernet 3/41 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
PAGE 542
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
PAGE 543
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
PAGE 544
33 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
PAGE 545
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
PAGE 546
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
PAGE 547
| | * Multicast Address * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
PAGE 548
ipv6 mld query-interval Reducing Host Response Burstiness General Queries contain a Query Response Interval value, which is the amount of time the host has to respond to a general query. Hosts set a timer to a random number less than the Query Response Interval upon receiving a general query, and send a report when the timer expires. Increasing this value spreads host responses over a greater period of time, and so reduces response burstiness.
PAGE 549
ipv6 mld explicit-tracking Reducing Leave Latency Leave Latency is the amount of time after the last host leaves the MLD group that the router stops forwarding traffic for that group. Latency is introduced because the router attempts several times to determine if there are any remaining members before stopping traffic for the group. The Querier sends a Multicast-Address-Specific Query upon receiving a Done message to ascertain whether there are any remain receivers for a group.
PAGE 550
31 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
PAGE 551
• Adding and Removing Interfaces • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Setting STP path cost as constant • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS
PAGE 552
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
PAGE 553
• spanning-tree 0 To remove an interface from the MSTP topology, use the no spanning-tree 0 command. Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances To create multiple spanning tree instances, use the following command. A single MSTI provides no more benefit than RSTP. To take full advantage of MSTP, create multiple MSTIs and map VLANs to them. • Create an MSTI. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI.
PAGE 554
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.384 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e806.953e Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e809.c24a Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 555
Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode name name • Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number Example of the name Command To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 556
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell EMC Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3 Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. 4 Change the max-hops parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-hops number The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20.
PAGE 557
Port Cost Default Value 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 800 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 500 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 400 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100 Mb/s Ethernet interfaces 100000 Port Channel with 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 10000 Port Channel with 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1000 Port Channel with 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 400 Port Channel with 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 100 To
PAGE 558
Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode, an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states. The bpduguard shutdown-on-violation option causes the interface hardware to be shut down when it receives a BPDU.
PAGE 559
MSTP Sample Configurations The running-configurations support the topology shown in the following illustration. The configurations are from Dell EMC Networking OS systems. Figure 85. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology.
PAGE 560
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
PAGE 561
3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
PAGE 562
exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode • debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
PAGE 563
name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 The following example shows viewing the debug log of a successful MSTP configuration. DellEMC#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu MSTP debug bpdu is ON DellEMC# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Gi 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.
PAGE 564
32 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
PAGE 565
Protocol Ethernet Address RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. • Multicast traffic can be forwarded to a maximum of 15 VLANs with the same outgoing interface.
PAGE 566
3w1d13h: %RPM0-P:RP2 %PIM-3-PIM_TIB_LIMIT: PIM TIB below low watermark. Route learning will begin. To limit the number of multicast routes, use the following command. • Limit the total number of multicast routes on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 16000. The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe.
PAGE 567
Figure 86. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 49. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 568
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 569
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Preventing a Source from Registering with the RP To prevent the PIM source DR from sending register packets to route processor (RP) for the specified multicast source and group, use the following command.
PAGE 570
Figure 87. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 50. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 571
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 572
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
PAGE 573
Important Points to Remember • Destination address of the mtrace query message can be either a unicast or a multicast address. NOTE: When you use mtrace to trace a specific multicast group, the query is sent with the group's address as the destination. Retries of the query use the unicast address of the receiver. • When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver.
PAGE 574
– Proto — multicast routing protocol – Forwarding code — error code as present in the response blocks – Source Network/Mask — source mask Example of the mtrace Command to View the Network Path The following is an example of tracing a multicast route. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.
PAGE 575
The response data block filled in by the last-hop router contains a Forwarding code field. Forwarding code can be added at any node and is not restricted to the last hop router. This field is used to record error codes before forwarding the response to the next neighbor in the path towards the source. In a response data packet, the following error codes are supported: Table 52.
PAGE 576
Scenario Output 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command specifying the source multicast tree and multicast group without specifying the destination. Mtrace traces the complete path traversing through the multicast group to reach the source. The output displays the destination and the first hop (-1) as 0 to indicate any PIM enabled interface on the node. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.
PAGE 577
Scenario Output -2 101.101.101.102 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command by providing the source and multicast information. However, if the multicast group is a shared group (*,G), then mtrace traces the path of the shared tree until it reaches the RP. The source mask field reflects the shared tree that is being used to trace the path.
PAGE 578
Scenario Output -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM No route default ----------------------------------------------------------------- If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
PAGE 579
Scenario Output -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 99.99.0.0/16 -4 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
PAGE 580
Scenario scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. Output ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
PAGE 581
33 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
PAGE 582
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
PAGE 583
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
PAGE 584
| | * Multicast Address * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
PAGE 585
ipv6 mld query-interval Reducing Host Response Burstiness General Queries contain a Query Response Interval value, which is the amount of time the host has to respond to a general query. Hosts set a timer to a random number less than the Query Response Interval upon receiving a general query, and send a report when the timer expires. Increasing this value spreads host responses over a greater period of time, and so reduces response burstiness.
PAGE 586
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Displaying MLD groups table Display MLD groups. Group information can be filtered. To display MLD groups, use the following command: EXEC Privilege show ipv6 mld groups Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires 00:02:05 Last Reporter 1::2 Displaying MLD Interfaces Display MLD interfaces.
PAGE 587
ipv6 mld snooping enable Disable MLD Snooping When MLD is enabled globally, it is by default enabled on all the VLANs. To disable MLD snooping on a VLAN, use the following command: INTERFACE VLAN Mode no ipv6 mld snooping NOTE: Under the default configuration, there is no need to configure ipv6 mld snooping for any VLAN. Configure the switch as a querier Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report.
PAGE 588
Enable Snooping Explicit Tracking The switch can be a querier, and therefore also has an option of updating the group table through explicit-tracking. Whether the switch is the querier or not, if snooping is enabled, the switch tracks all the MLD joins. It has a separate explicit tracking table which contains group, source, interface, VLAN, and reporter details.
PAGE 589
34 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell EMC Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell EMC Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
PAGE 590
Figure 88. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. • A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
PAGE 591
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
PAGE 592
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
PAGE 593
To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface, use the following commands. 1 Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id interface interface line-protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500. 2 (Optional) Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface. OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds. The default is 0.
PAGE 594
For an IPv6 interface, a routing object only tracks the UP/DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface (the track interface ipv6routing command). • The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address. • The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IPv6 address is removed from the routing table.
PAGE 595
Interface GigabitEthernet 7/11 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix-length values. Optionally, for an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) table. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4/ IPv6 route.
PAGE 596
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1 Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500.
PAGE 597
The following example configures object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route: DellEMC(conf)#track 105 ipv6 route 1234::/64 reachability DellEMC(conf-track-105)#delay down 5 DellEMC(conf-track-105)#description Headquarters DellEMC(conf-track-105)#end DellEMC#show track 105 Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Configuring track reachability refresh interval If there is no entry in ARP tab
PAGE 598
2 • OSPF routes - 1 to 1592. The efault is 1. Configure object tracking on the metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} metric threshold [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500. Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. Valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32. Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. Valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to /128.
PAGE 599
The following example configures object tracking on the metric threshold of an IPv6 route: DellEMC(conf)#track 8 ipv6 route 2::/64 metric threshold DellEMC(conf-track-8)#threshold metric up 30 DellEMC(conf-track-8)#threshold metric down 40 Displaying Tracked Objects To display the currently configured objects used to track Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces, and IPv4 and IPv6 routes, use the following show commands.
PAGE 600
IP Route Resolution ISIS 1 OSPF 1 IPv6 Route Resolution ISIS 1 Example of the show track vrf Command DellEMC#show track vrf red Track 5 IP route 192.168.0.0/24 reachability, Vrf: red Reachability is Up (CONNECTED) 3 changes, last change 00:02:39 First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 1/4 Example of Viewing Object Tracking Configuration DellEMC#show running-config track track 1 ip route 23.0.0.
PAGE 601
35 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
PAGE 602
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 89. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
PAGE 603
• A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) can import AS external route information and send it to the backbone. It cannot receive external AS information from the backbone or other areas. • Totally stubby areas are referred to as no summary areas in the Dell EMC Networking OS. Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important.
PAGE 604
Figure 90. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
PAGE 605
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
PAGE 606
• Type 7: External LSA — Routers in an NSSA do not receive external LSAs from ABRs, but are allowed to send external routing information for redistribution. They use Type 7 LSAs to tell the ABRs about these external routes, which the ABR then translates to Type 5 external LSAs and floods as normal to the rest of the OSPF network. • Type 8: Link LSA (OSPFv3) — This LSA carries the IPv6 address information of the local links.
PAGE 607
Figure 91. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 16,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
PAGE 608
Graceful Restart When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
PAGE 609
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell EMC Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
PAGE 610
Examples of Setting and Viewing a Dead Interval In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold). DellEMC(conf)#int gigabitethernet 2/2 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/2)#ip ospf hello-interval 20 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/2)#ip ospf dead-interval 80 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/2)# In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold).
PAGE 611
• Troubleshooting OSPFv2 1 Configure a physical interface. Assign an IP address, physical or Loopback, to the interface to enable Layer 3 routing. 2 Enable OSPF globally. Assign network area and neighbors. 3 Add interfaces or configure other attributes. 4 Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation.
PAGE 612
The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process. The router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system.
PAGE 613
• Enable OSPFv2 on an interface and assign a network address range to a specific OSPF area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M. Enable OSPFv2 on Interfaces Enable and configure OSPFv2 on each interface (configure for Layer 3 protocol), and not shutdown. You can also assign OSPFv2 to a Loopback interface as a virtual interface.
PAGE 614
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State BDR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 13.1.1.1, Interface address 10.2.3.2 Backup Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.3.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:05 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 13.1.1.1 (Designated Router) DellEMC> Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process.
PAGE 615
area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area. Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id database-summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.
PAGE 616
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 GigabitEthernet 2/1 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 10.1.3.100 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
PAGE 617
DellEMC#(conf)#ex DellEMC##show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.2 Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Convergence Level 0 Min LSA origination 5 secs, Min LSA arrival 1 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces.
PAGE 618
• – number: the range is from 0 to 255 (the default is 1). Change the retransmission interval between LSAs. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 5 seconds). • The retransmit interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the wait period between link state update packets sent out the interface.
PAGE 619
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds This setting is the amount of time OSPF has available to change its interface authentication type. When you configure the auth-change-wait-time, OSPF sends out only the old authentication scheme until the wait timer expires. After the wait timer expires, OSPF sends only the new authentication scheme.
PAGE 620
• Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles. Selecting one or the other role restricts OSPFv2 to the single selected role. To disable OSPFv2 graceful-restart after you have enabled it, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command in CONFIGROUTEROSPF- id mode.
PAGE 621
CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Assign a configured prefix list to outgoing OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | isis | rip | static] Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process.
PAGE 622
• Have the OSPF routes been included in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show interfaces • show protocols • debug IP OSPF events and/or packets • show neighbors • show routes To help troubleshoot OSPFv2, use the following commands. • View the summary of all OSPF process IDs enables on the router. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config ospf • View the summary information of the IP routes.
PAGE 623
router-id 10.10.10.10 DellEMC# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology The following illustration is a sample basic OSPFv2 topology.
PAGE 624
network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.
PAGE 625
Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) This section describes the configuration tasks for Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) on the switch. The configuration options of OSPFv3 are the same as those options for OSPFv2, but you may configure OSPFv3 with differently labeled commands. Specify process IDs and areas and include interfaces and addresses in the process. Define areas as stub or totally stubby.
PAGE 626
Applying cost for OSPFv3 Change in bandwidth directly affects the cost of OSPF routes. • Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf interface-cost • – interface-cost:The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost is based on the bandwidth. Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. The cost of an interface is calculated as Reference Bandwidth/Interface speed.
PAGE 627
– process-id: the process ID number assigned. – area-id: the area ID for this interface. Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID Globally To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 globally, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process globally and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} • The range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} – number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
PAGE 628
no ipv6 router ospf process-id vrf {vrf-name} • Reset the OSPFv3 process. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] process Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command. • Configure the area as a stub area. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode area area-id stub [no-summary] – no-summary: use these keywords to prevent transmission in to the area of summary ASBR LSAs. – Area ID: a number or IP address assigned when creating the area.
PAGE 629
redistribute {bgp | connected | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [routemap map-name] [tag tag-value] Configure the following required and optional parameters: – bgp | connected | static: enter one of the keywords to redistribute those routes. – metric metric-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295. – metric-type metric-type: enter 1 for OSPFv3 external route type 1 OR 2 for OSPFv3 external route type 2. – route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map.
PAGE 630
• The valid values are from 40 to 1800 seconds. Configure an OSPFv3 interface to not act on the Grace LSAs that it receives from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject • Specify the operating mode and type of events that trigger a graceful restart. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only] – Planned-only: the OSPFv3 router supports graceful restart only for planned restarts.
PAGE 631
The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database database-summary command. DellEMC#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary ! OSPFv3 Router with ID (200.1.1.
PAGE 632
With IPsec-based authentication, Crypto images are used to include the IPsec secure socket application programming interface (API) required for use with OSPFv3. To ensure integrity, data origin authentication, detection and rejection of replays, and confidentiality of the packet, RFC 4302 and RFC 4303 propose using two security protocols — authentication header (AH) and encapsulating security payload (ESP).
PAGE 633
NOTE: To encrypt all keys on a router, use the service password-encryption command in Global Configuration mode. However, this command does not provide a high level of network security. To enable key encryption in an IPsec security policy at an interface or area level, specify 7 for [key-encryption-type] when you enter the ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec or ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec command.
PAGE 634
The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link. • Enable IPsec encryption for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6-based interface.
PAGE 635
– spi number: is the SPI value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. – MD5 | SHA1: specifies the authentication type: message digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). – key-encryption-type: (optional) specifies if the key is encrypted. The valid values are 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). • • – key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information.
PAGE 636
show crypto ipsec policy Displaying OSPFv3 IPsec Security Policies To display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies, use the following commands. • Display the AH and ESP parameters configured in IPsec security policies, including the SPI number, key, and algorithms used. EXEC Privilege mode show crypto ipsec policy [name name] • – name: displays configuration details about a specified policy.
PAGE 637
Outbound ESP Auth Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0c30808825fb5 Inbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Outbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Transform set : esp-128-aes esp-sha1-hmac The following example shows the show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command.
PAGE 638
• Did you configure the interfaces for Layer 3 correctly? • Is the router in the correct area type? • Did you include the routes in the OSPF database? • Did you include the OSPF routes in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show ipv6 interfaces • show ipv6 protocols • debug ipv6 ospf events and/or packets • show ipv6 neighbors • show ipv6 routes Viewing Summary Information To get general route, configuration, links status, and debug i
PAGE 639
MIB Object OID Description ospfv3AsLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.3.1 Contains OSPFv3 process’s AS-scope link state database. The LSDB contains the ASscope link state advertisements. ospfv3AreaLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.4.1 Contains OSPFv3 process’s Area-scope link state database. The LSDB contains the Areas-scope link state advertisements. ospfv3LinkLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.5.1 Contains OSPFv3 process’s Link-scope LSDB for non-virtual interfaces. ospfv3IfEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.7.
PAGE 640
36 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
PAGE 641
• • Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • • • • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
PAGE 642
The Dell EMC Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Because the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers. Never apply the permit statement because the redirect list covers all source and destination IP addresses. ip redirect-list rcl0 seq 5 redirect 2.2.2.2 ip any any seq 10 permit ip host 3.3.3.
PAGE 643
• FORMAT: slot/port • ip-protocol-number or protocol-type is the type of protocol to be redirected • FORMAT: 0-255 for IP protocol number, or enter protocol type • source ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Source’s IP address • FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address • destination ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Destination’s IP address • FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address To delete a rule, use the no redirect command.
PAGE 644
! ip redirect-list test seq 10 redirect 10.1.1.2 ip 20.1.1.0/24 any seq 15 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/25 any seq 20 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/24 any DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)# NOTE: Starting with the Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0), the use of multiple recursive routes with the same source-address and destination-address combination in a redirect policy on an router.
PAGE 645
In addition to supporting multiple redirect-lists in a redirect-group, multiple redirect-groups are supported on a single interface. Dell EMC Networking OS has the capability to support multiple groups on an interface for backup purposes. Show Redirect List Configuration To view the configuration redirect list configuration, use the following commands. 1 View the redirect list configuration and the associated interfaces.
PAGE 646
NOTE: If you apply the redirect-list to an interface, the output of the show ip redirect-list redirect-listname command displays reachability status for the specified next-hop.
PAGE 647
Create the Redirect-List GOLD Assign Redirect-List GOLD to Interface 2/11 View Redirect-List GOLD Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Redirect IPs Create Track Objects to track the Redirect IPs: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#track 3 ip host 42.1.1.2 reachability DellEMC(conf-track-3)#probe icmp DellEMC(conf-track-3)#track 4 ip host 43.1.1.
PAGE 648
reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.144, Track 4 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) Applied interfaces: Te 2/28 DellEMC# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Tunnel Interfaces Creating steps for Tunnel Interfaces: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel destination 40.1.1.2 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
PAGE 649
DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit DellEMC(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: DellEMC#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.
PAGE 650
37 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM.
PAGE 651
Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1 After receiving an IGMP Leave message, the gateway removes the interface on which it is received from the outgoing interface list of the (*,G) entry.
PAGE 652
CONFIGURATION mode {ip | ipv6} multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. • Configuring S,G Expiry Timers • Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point • Configuring a Designated Router • Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1 Enable IPv4 or IPv6 multicast routing on the system.
PAGE 653
To display PIM neighbors for each interface, use the show {ip | ipv6} pim neighbor [detail] command EXEC Privilege mode. Following is an example of show ip pim neighbor command output: DellEMC#show Neighbor Address 127.87.5.5 127.87.3.5 127.87.50.
PAGE 654
GigabitEthernet 1/11 GigabitEthernet 1/12 GigabitEthernet 1/13 Configuring S,G Expiry Timers You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries). By default, [S,G] entries expire in 210 seconds. When you create, delete, or update an expiry time, the changes are applied when the keep alive timer refreshes. To configure a global expiry time, use the following command. Enable global expiry timer for S, G entries.
PAGE 655
no shutdown DellEMC#show running-configuration pim ! ipv6 pim rp-address 2111:dddd:0eee::22/64 group-address 2111:dddd:0eee::22/128 Overriding Bootstrap Router Updates PIM-SM routers must know the address of the RP for each group for which they have (*,G) entry. This address is obtained automatically through the bootstrap router (BSR) mechanism or a static RP configuration. Use the following command if you have configured a static RP for a group.
PAGE 656
router with the greatest priority value is the DR. If the priority value is the same for two routers, then the router with the greatest IPv4 or IPv6 address is the DR. By default, the DR priority value is 192, so the IP address determines the DR. • Assign a DR priority value. INTERFACE mode {ip | ipv6} pim dr-priority priority-value • Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages. INTERFACE mode {ip | ipv6} pim query-interval seconds • Display the current value of these parameter.
PAGE 657
Mode Count Intvl Prio Gi 1/3 v2/S 1 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f DR : this router Gi 1/11 v2/S 0 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:1417 DR : this router Dell# Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet.
PAGE 658
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate 2 Enter the following IPv4 or IPv6 command to make a PIM router a RP candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim rp-candidate ipv6 pim rp-candidate 3 Display IPv4 or IPv6 Bootstrap Router information. EXEC Privilege show ip pim bsr-router Example: DellEMC# show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.
PAGE 659
38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
PAGE 660
2 Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1 Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2 Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
PAGE 661
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
PAGE 662
Some routers within the domain are configured to be C-RPs. Other routers are configured to be Bootstrap Router candidates (C-BSRs); one router is elected the BSR for the domain and the BSR is responsible for forwarding BSM containing RP-set information to other routers. The RP election process is as follows: 1 C-BSRs flood their candidacy throughout the domain in a BSM. Each message contains a BSR priority value, and the C-BSR with the highest priority value becomes the BSR.
PAGE 663
BSR address: 200::1 (?) BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 126 Expires: 00:01:43 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 100::1, priority: 0, hash mask length: 126 Next Cand_RP_advertisement in 00:00:25 RP: 100::1(Lo 0) DellEMC# Enabling RP to Server Specific Multicast Groups When you configure an RP candidate, its advertisement is sent to the entire multicast address range and the group-to-RP mapping is advertised for the entire range of multicast address.
PAGE 664
39 Power over Ethernet (PoE) The PoE feature supports electrical power and transmission of data on Ethernet cabling. A single cable can provide both data connection and electrical power to the attached devices such as wireless access points or IP cameras. Power over Ethernet (PoE), as described by IEEE 802.3af specifies that a maximum of 15.4 watts can be transmitted to Ethernet devices over the signal pairs of an unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable.
PAGE 665
Enable PoE/PoE+ PoE/PoE+ is disabled by default. You can enable PoE/PoE+ on a port by using the power inline command in the INTERFACE mode. • To manage the inline power in a stack unit, use the Class or Static mode. See Manage Inline Power. • To limit the maximum amount of power available to a powered device and to set the priority of power access by the ports, use the power inline {[max_milliwatts] | priority {critical | high | low}} command.
PAGE 666
Dell# show os-version PoE-CONTROLLER IMAGE INFORMATION --------------------------------------------------------------------Type Version PoE Controller 2.63 3 Verify the power details on the stack unit.
PAGE 667
Advertising Extended Power The power device(PD) sends the information in the LLDP-MED extended power via MDI TLV and information in the IEEE 802.3 power via MDI TLV. Dell Networking OS uses the following information sent through LLDP-MED extended power-via-MDI TLV. The power is advertised using the advertise med power-via-mdi command. • Power Requirement — Used for power allocation. • Power Priority — Used for priority calculation. The values are: Critical, High, Low.
PAGE 668
This command has the following parameters. • stack unit unit-number — Enter the keywords stack unit and specify the stack unit number. The range is from 1 to 12. • threshold-value — Enter the power threshold limit value in percentage. Range is from 10 to 99. Default value is 99. Example of Setting the Global Threshold Limit The following example sets the global threshold limit for the PoE power budget to 10 percent on stack unit 1.
PAGE 669
Power Allocation to Additional Ports When additional ports are enabled with PoE/PoE+, the power is allocated based on the budget. The power budget is the amount of power available from the installed PSUs minus the power required to operate the ports. Use the show power inline and show power detail commands to determine if power is available for additional PoE ports. For more information about these commands, see Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 670
Restore Power Delivery on a Port You can temporarily disable and then restore power on a port. To disable the power delivery, see Suspend Power Delivery on a Port. To restore the suspended inline power, use the power inline restore stack-unit unit number command.
PAGE 671
40 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
PAGE 672
• Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session.
PAGE 673
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-300)# DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-300)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode TTL Drop Rate Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ------------------ --------- -------------- -----0 Te 1/50 Te 1/51 rx Port A No N/A N/A yes 1 Gi 1/45 Gi 1/46 tx Port A No N/A N/A yes 2 NONE NONE N/A N/A A No N/A N/A No 300 Gi 1/17 Gi 1/4 tx Port A No N/A N/A No DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-300)# Source IP Dest IP DSCP --------- -------- ---- N/A N/A N/A N/ N/A N/A N/A N/ N/A N/A N/A N/ N
PAGE 674
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The platform continues to mirror outgoing traffic even after an MD participating in spanning tree protocol (STP) transitions from the forwarding to blocking. Configuring Port Monitoring To configure port monitoring, use the following commands. 1 Verify that the intended monitoring port has no configuration other than no shutdown, as shown in the following example.
PAGE 675
A A A 0 1 N/A Po 10 N/A Vl 40 N/A No Gi 1/2 No Gi 1/3 No rx Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ rx Flow 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ NOTE: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring. Please refer section Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring. In the following example, the host and server are exchanging traffic which passes through the uplink interface 1/1.
PAGE 676
show run monitor session DellEMC#show run monitor session ! monitor multicast-queue 7 DellEMC# Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. NOTE: Flow-based monitoring is supported for known unicast egress traffic.
PAGE 677
DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.1.254/24 ip access-group testflow in shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#do show ip accounting access-list testflow ! Extended Ingress IP access list testflow on GigabitEthernet 1/1 Total cam count 4 seq 5 permit icmp any any 53 monitor 53 count bytes (0 packets 0 bytes) seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
PAGE 678
Figure 95. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
PAGE 679
• The L3 interface configuration should be blocked for RPM VLAN. • The member port of the reserved VLAN should have MTU and IPMTU value as MAX+4 (to hold the VLAN tag parameter). • To associate with source session, the reserved VLAN can have at max of only 4 member ports. • To associate with destination session, the reserved VLAN can have multiple member ports.
PAGE 680
• A destination port cannot be used in any spanning tree instance. • The reserved VLAN used to transport mirrored traffic must be a L2 VLAN. L3 VLANs are not supported. • On a source switch on which you configure source ports for remote port mirroring, you can add only one port to the dedicated RPM VLAN which is used to transport mirrored traffic. You can configure multiple ports for the dedicated RPM VLAN on intermediate and destination switches.
PAGE 681
Configuring a RSPAN VLAN for RPM Following are the steps for configuring a RSPAN VLAN for RPM. You must repeat the below mentioned steps on source, intermediate, and destination switches. 1 Enter global configuration mode. EXEC mode configure terminal 2 Create a VLAN to transport mirrored traffic in RPM. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 3 Configure the RSPAN VLAN to be used to transport mirrored traffic in RPM.
PAGE 682
Configuring a destination session Following are the steps for configuring a destination session on a switch. You can configure the below steps on other destination switches to configure additional destination ports for this RPM session. 1 Configure the destination session for RPM. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session session-id 2 Associate the Layer 2 VLAN used to transport monitored traffic with this destination session.
PAGE 683
• 8 is gigabitethernet 1/8 Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on a source switch The below configuration example shows that the source is a source port and the destination is the reserved VLAN (for example, remotevlan 10).
PAGE 684
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#flow-based enable DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#exit DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list standard mac_acl DellEMC(config-std-macl)#permit 00:00:00:00:11:22 count monitor DellEMC(config-std-macl)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 100 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#mac access-group mac_acl1 in DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#exit DellEMC(conf)# Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on an intermediate switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an intermediate switch.
PAGE 685
Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on an intermediate switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an intermediate switch. DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#mode remote-port-mirroring DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged gigabitethernet 1/4 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged gigabitethernet 1/5 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#exit Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on a Destination switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on a destination switch.
PAGE 686
To configure an ERPM session: Table 56. Configuration steps for ERPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type erpm Specify a session ID and ERPM as the type of monitoring session, and enter the Monitoring-Session configuration mode. The session number needs to be unique and not already defined. 3 source { interface | range } direction {rx | tx | both} Specify the source port or range of ports.
PAGE 687
tagged GigabitEthernet 1/1-3 mac access-group flow in <<<<<<<<<<<<<< Only ingress packets are supported for mirroring shutdown ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 97.
PAGE 688
– The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. In case of a packet with L3 VLAN, it would be 42 bytes long. The original payload /original mirrored data starts from the 39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off. – Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e.
PAGE 689
VLT Non-fail over Scenario Consider a scenario where port monitoring is configured to mirror traffic on a VLT device's port or LAG to a destination port on some other device (TOR) on the network. When there is no fail over to the VLT peer, the VLTi link (ICL LAG) also receives the mirrored traffic as the VLTi link is added as an implicit member of the RPM vlan. As a result, the mirrored traffic also reaches the peer VLT device effecting VLTi link's bandwidth usage.
PAGE 690
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring using Intermediate VLT device — No restrictions apply In this scenario, the VLT device acts as the intermediate device in remote mirroring. The TOR switch contains the source-RPM configurations that enable mirroring of the VLT lag (of the TOR switch) to any orphan port in the VLT device. The packet analyzer is connected through the VLT device, but not directly to the VLT device. None.
PAGE 691
41 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 692
– A primary VLAN and each of its secondary VLANs decrement the available number of VLAN IDs in the switch. – A primary VLAN has one or more promiscuous ports. – A primary VLAN might have one or more trunk ports, or none. • Secondary VLAN — a subdomain of the primary VLAN. – There are two types of secondary VLAN — community VLAN and isolated VLAN.
PAGE 693
• Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan mapping • Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port. INTERFACE switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk} NOTE: Secondary VLANs are Layer 2 VLANs, so even if they are operationally down while primary VLANs are operationally up, Layer 3 traffic is still transmitted across secondary VLANs. NOTE: The outputs of the show arp and show vlan commands provide PVLAN data.
PAGE 694
The following example shows the switchport mode private-vlan command on a port and on a port channel.
PAGE 695
6 (OPTIONAL) Assign an IP address to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip address ip address 7 (OPTIONAL) Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip local-proxy-arp NOTE: If a promiscuous or host port is untagged in a VLAN and it receives a tagged packet in the same VLAN, the packet is NOT dropped. Creating a Community VLAN A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN in a private VLAN.
PAGE 696
3 Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to isolated. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode isolated 4 Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add ports defined as host to the VLAN.
PAGE 697
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 98. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: • Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. • Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
PAGE 698
In parallel, on S4810: • Te 1/3 is a promiscuous port and Te 1/25 is a PVLAN trunk port, assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/4-6 are host ports. Te 1/4 and Te 1/5 are assigned to the community VLAN 4001, while Te 1/6 is assigned to the isolated VLAN 4003. The result is that: • The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500.
PAGE 699
The following example shows using the show vlan private-vlan mapping command. S50-1#show vlan private-vlan mapping Private Vlan: Primary : 4000 Isolated : 4003 Community : 4001 NOTE: In the following example, notice the addition of the PVLAN codes – P, I, and C – in the left column. The following example shows viewing the VLAN status.
PAGE 700
42 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 701
Table 58. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking OS Supports Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
PAGE 702
protocol spanning-tree pvst 2 Enable PVST+. PROTOCOL PVST mode no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
PAGE 703
Figure 100. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
PAGE 704
Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Gi 1/32 Port 375 (GigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 705
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
PAGE 706
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
PAGE 707
Figure 101. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
PAGE 708
no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface GigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthe
PAGE 709
protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) 709
PAGE 710
43 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 60.
PAGE 711
Feature Direction Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 102.
PAGE 712
• Policy-Based QoS Configurations • DSCP Color Maps • Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment • Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing • Weighted Random Early Detection • Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space • Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED • Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes • Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets • Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface • Applying DSCP and VLAN Match Criteria on a Service Queue • Classifying Incoming Pac
PAGE 713
Table 61. dot1p-priority Values and Queue Numbers dot1p Queue Number 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface.
PAGE 714
When priority-tagged frames ingress an untagged port or hybrid port, the frames are classified to the default VLAN of the port and to a queue according to their dot1p priority if you configure service-class dynamic dotp or trust dot1p. When priority-tagged frames ingress a tagged port, the frames are dropped because, for a tagged port, the default VLAN is 0. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: Hybrid ports can receive untagged, tagged, and priority tagged frames.
PAGE 715
Example of rate shape Command DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#rate shape 500 50 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 103. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic.
PAGE 716
Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL. You can also use VLAN IDs and VRF IDs to classify the traffic using layer 3 class-maps. You may specify more than one DSCP and IP precedence value, but only one value must match to trigger a positive match for the class map. NOTE: IPv6 and IP-any class maps cannot match on ACLs or VLANs. Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map.
PAGE 717
The following example matches the IPv6 traffic with a DSCP value of 40: DellEMC(conf)# class-map match-all test DellEMC(conf-class-map)# match ipv6 dscp 40 The following example matches the IPv4 and IPv6 traffic with a precedence value of 3: DellEMC(conf)# class-map match-any test1 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#match ip-any precedence 3 Creating a Layer 2 Class Map All class maps are Layer 3 by default; however, you can create a Layer 2 class map by specifying the layer2 option with the class-map command.
PAGE 718
The order can range from 0 to 254. By default, all ACL rules have an order of 255. Displaying Configured Class Maps and Match Criteria To display all class-maps or a specific class map, use the following command. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: An explicit “deny any" rule in a Layer 3 ACL used in a (match any or match all) class-map creates a "default to Queue 0" entry in the CAM, which causes unintended traffic classification. In the following example, traffic is classified in two Queues, 1 and 2.
PAGE 719
• Layer 3 — QoS input policies allow you to rate police and set a DSCP or dot1p value. In addition, you can configure a drop precedence for incoming packets based on their DSCP value by using a DSCP color map. For more information, see DSCP Color Maps. • Layer 2 — QoS input policies allow you to rate police and set a dot1p value. Output QoS policies regulate egress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for output QoS policies are bandwidth percentage, scheduler strict, rate shaping and WRED.
PAGE 720
Allocating Bandwidth to Queue Specifying WRED Drop Precedence Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping To configure policy-based rate shaping, use the following command. • Configure rate shape egress traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode rate-shape Allocating Bandwidth to Queue The switch schedules packets for egress based on Deficit Round Robin (DRR). This strategy offers a guaranteed data rate. Allocate bandwidth to queues only in terms of percentage in 4-queue and 8-queue systems.
PAGE 721
For more information, refer to Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic. Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output. Creating Input Policy Maps There are two types of input policy-maps: Layer 3 and Layer 2. 1 Create a Layer 3 input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map-input Create a Layer 2 input policy map by specifying the keyword layer2 with the policy-map-input command.
PAGE 722
Table 63.
PAGE 723
• All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable service-class dynamic dot1p on an interface or globally. • Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supersede dot1p service classes. • Create service classes. INTERFACE mode service-class dynamic dot1p Guaranteeing Bandwidth to dot1p-Based Service Queues To guarantee bandwidth to dot1p-based service queues, use the following command.
PAGE 724
Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue To apply an output QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Apply an output QoS policy to queues. INTERFACE mode service-queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. • Specify an aggregate QoS policy. POLICY-MAP-OUT mode policy-aggregate Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command.
PAGE 725
• A DSCP value cannot be in both the yellow and red lists. Setting the red or yellow list with any DSCP value that is already in the other list results in an error and no update to that DSCP list is made. • Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green.
PAGE 726
Display a specific DSCP color map. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration To display the DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces, use the show qos dscp-color-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} command in EXEC mode. summary: Displays summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces.
PAGE 727
• Specify the number of bytes of packet overhead to include in rate limiting, policing, and shaping calculations. CONFIGURATION mode qos-rate-adjust overhead-bytes For example, to include the Preamble and SFD, type qos-rate-adjust 8. For variable length overhead fields, know the number of bytes you want to include. The default is disabled. The range is from 1 to 31.
PAGE 728
Figure 104. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Table 65. Pre-Defined WRED Profiles Default Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold Maximum Drop Rate wred_drop 0 0 100 wred_teng_y 467 4671 100 wred_teng_g 467 4671 50 wred_fortyg_y 467 4671 50 wred_fortyg_g 467 4671 25 Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1 Create a WRED profile.
PAGE 729
Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell EMC Networking OS should apply the profile. Dell EMC Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it. DSCP is a 6–bit field. Dell EMC Networking uses the first three bits (LSB) of this field (DP) to determine the drop precedence. • DP values of 110 and 100, 101 map to yellow; all other values map to green.
PAGE 730
DellEMC# Displaying egress–queue Statistics To display the number of transmitted and dropped packets and their rate on the egress queues of an interface, use the following command: • Display the number of packets and number of bytes on the egress-queue profile.
PAGE 731
• Status — indicates whether the specified policy-map can be completely applied to an interface in the port-pipe. – Allowed — indicates that the policy-map can be applied because the estimated number of CAM entries is less or equal to the available number of CAM entries. The number of interfaces in the port-pipe to which the policy-map can be applied is given in parentheses.
PAGE 732
Global Service Pools With WRED and ECN Settings Support for global service pools is now available. You can configure global service pools that are shared buffer pools accessed by multiple queues when the minimum guaranteed buffers for the queue are consumed. Two service pools are used– one for loss-based queues and the other for lossless (priority-based flow control (PFC)) queues. You can enable WRED and ECN configuration on the global service-pools.
PAGE 733
Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes The functionality to configure a weight factor for the WRED and ECN functionality for backplane ports is supported on the platform. WRED drops packets when the average queue length exceeds the configured threshold value to signify congestion. Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded.
PAGE 734
• Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell EMC Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently. • If single rate two color policer is configured along with this feature, then by default all packets less than PIR would be considered as “Green” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”.
PAGE 735
3 Attach the policy-map to the interface. Dell EMC Networking OS support different types of match qualifiers to classify the incoming traffic. Match qualifiers can be directly configured in the class-map command or it can be specified through one or more ACL which in turn specifies the combination of match qualifiers. Until Release 9.3(0.0), support is available for classifying traffic based on the 6-bit DSCP field of the IPv4 packet.
PAGE 736
By default, all packets are considered as ‘green’ (without the rate-policer and trust-diffserve configuration) and hence support would be provided to mark the packets as ‘yellow’ alone will be provided. By default Dell EMC Networking OS drops all the ‘RED’ or ‘violate’ packets.
PAGE 737
seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map m
PAGE 738
Applying DSCP and VLAN Match Criteria on a Service Queue You can configure Layer 3 class maps which contain both a Layer 3 Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) and IP VLAN IDs as match criteria to filter incoming packets on a service queue on the switch. To configure a Layer 3 class map to classify traffic according to both an IP VLAN ID and DSCP value, use the match ip vlan vlan-id command in class-map input configuration mode.
PAGE 739
Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and ColorMarking Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded. If you configure ECN for WRED, devices employ this functionality of ECN to mark the packets and reduce the rate of sending packets in a congested, heavily-loaded network.
PAGE 740
Similar to ‘dscp’ qualifier in the existing L3 ACL command, the ‘ecn’ qualifier can be used along with all other supported ACL match qualifiers such as SIP/DIP/TCP/UDP/SRC PORT/DST PORT/ ICMP. Until Release 9.3(0.0), ACL supports classification based on the below TCP flags: • ACK • FIN • SYN • PSH • RST • URG You can now use the ‘ecn’ match qualifier along with the above TCP flag for classification.
PAGE 741
– FIN – SYN – PSH – RST – URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported. • Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell EMC Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently.
PAGE 742
seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50 ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-ma
PAGE 743
44 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
PAGE 744
Implementation Information Dell EMC Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell EMC Networking OS. Table 67.
PAGE 745
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell EMC Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
PAGE 746
192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes. By default, interfaces that you enable and configure with an IP address in the same subnet as the RIP network address receive RIPv1 and RIPv2 routes and send RIPv1 routes.
PAGE 747
Adding RIP Routes from Other Instances In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the RIP process. With the redistribute command, you can include open shortest path first (OSPF), static, or directly connected routes in the RIP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands. • Include directly connected or user-configured (static) routes in RIP.
PAGE 748
INTERFACE mode ip rip send version [1] [2] Examples of the RIP Process To see whether the version command is configured, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. The following example shows the RIP configuration after the ROUTER RIP mode version command is set to RIPv2. When you set the ROUTER RIP mode version command, the interface () participating in the RIP process is also set to send and receive RIPv2 (shown in bold).
PAGE 749
Generating a Default Route Traffic is forwarded to the default route when the traffic’s network is not explicitly listed in the routing table. Default routes are not enabled in RIP unless specified. Use the default-information originate command in ROUTER RIP mode to generate a default route into RIP. In Dell EMC Networking OS, default routes received in RIP updates from other routes are advertised if you configure the default-information originate command.
PAGE 750
– weight: the range is from 1 to 255. The default is 120. – ip-address mask: the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), and the mask in slash format (/x). • – access-list-name: the name of a configured IP ACL. Apply an additional number to the incoming or outgoing route metrics.
PAGE 751
Figure 105. RIP Topology Example RIP Configuration on Core2 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core2. Example of Configuring RIPv2 on Core 2 Core2(conf-if-gi-2/3)# Core2(conf-if-gi-2/3)#router rip Core2(conf-router_rip)#ver 2 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.200.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.300.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.
PAGE 752
The following example shows the show ip route command to show the RIP setup on Core 2.
PAGE 753
Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.2.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.30.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.0 version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)# Core 3 RIP Output The examples in this section show the core 2 RIP output. • To display Core 3 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 3 RIP setup, use the show ip route command.
PAGE 754
The following example shows the show ip protocols command to show the RIP configuration activity on Core 3.
PAGE 755
! interface GigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.11.20.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/4 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/5 ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
PAGE 756
45 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
PAGE 757
Setting the RMON Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
PAGE 758
CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] – number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table. – log: (Optional) generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or logand-trap. Default is no log.
PAGE 759
[no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] – controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. – integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The value must be a unique index in the RMON History Table. – owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
PAGE 760
46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.
PAGE 761
• Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell EMC Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
PAGE 762
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)# Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. • Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports.
PAGE 763
Figure 106. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. DellEMC#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 764
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.379, designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 5 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (GigabitEthernet 2/4) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 765
The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 69.
PAGE 766
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
PAGE 767
• Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value – priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535. The lower the number assigned, the more likely this bridge becomes the root bridge. The default is 32768. Entries must be multiples of 4096. Example of the bridge-priority Command A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned.
PAGE 768
interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-2/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed. To achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster, use RSTP fast hellos.
PAGE 769
47 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 770
48 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
PAGE 771
Enabling AAA Accounting The aaa accounting command allows you to create a record for any or all of the accounting functions monitored. To enable AAA accounting, use the following command. • Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function.
PAGE 772
System accounting can use only the default method list. Example of Configuring AAA Accounting to Track EXEC and EXEC Privilege Level Command Use In the following sample configuration, AAA accounting is set to track all usage of EXEC commands and commands on privilege level 15.
PAGE 773
NAS receives the accounting request from the supplicant and sends the RADIUS request packet to the accounting server after successful authentication. The RADIUS Accounting request contains a RADIUS Acct-Status-Type as Start or Stop to update the supplicant session to the accounting server. NOTE: In RADIUS accounting, fallback behavior among RADIUS and TACACS servers is not supported as the RADIUS accounting feature is not available in Dell EMC Networking OS version earlier than 9.14.1.5.
PAGE 774
Tmp-String-9 = "ai:" Acct-Unique-Session-Id = "2d6c5beef615d18fa21bbde29411f6d5" Timestamp = 1557508935 MAB START record: Fri May 10 23:30:21 2019 User-Name = "001122334455" Called-Station-Id = "00-11-33-44-77-88" Calling-Station-Id = "00-11-22-33-44-55" NAS-IP-Address = 10.16.133.
PAGE 775
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 40 Acct-Status-Type START 44 Acct-Session-Id CLI Session-Id - To match start and stop session requests. 61 NAS-Port-Type ASYNC - for console session. Accounting Attributes VIRTUAL - for telnet/SSH session. Table 71. RADIUS Accounting Stop Record Attributes for CLI user RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS.
PAGE 776
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. Session Identification Attributes 1 User-Name User name/ Supplicant MAC Address (for MAB). 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated. 6 Service-Type Framed (2) for EAP /Call check (10) for MAB. 8 Framed-IP-Address IPv4 address of supplicant. 168 Framed-IPV6-Address IPv6 address of supplicant. 30 Called-Station-Id Switch MAC Address. 31 Calling-Station-Id Supplicant MAC Address.
PAGE 777
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 61 NAS-Port-Type Ethernet NOTE: During the administrative initiated reload and system failover events, the accounting Stop records for the 802.1x authorized supplicants are not sent to RADIUS server. Table 75. Use cases for dot1x supplicant to trigger RADIUS Accounting Start/Stop records dot1x event Accounting type Attributes Dot1x user authentication success Start Start record attributes for dot1x supplicant.
PAGE 778
AAA Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports a distributed client/server system implemented through authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) to help secure networks against unauthorized access.
PAGE 779
2 • enable: use the password you defined using the enable secret, enable password, or enable sha256-password command in CONFIGURATION mode. In general, the enable secret command overrules the enable password command. If you configure the enable sha256-password command, it overrules both the enable secret and enable password commands. • line: use the password you defined using the password command in LINE mode. • local: use the username/password database defined in the local configuration.
PAGE 780
3 Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host x.x.x.x key some-password Examples of the enable commands for RADIUS To get enable authentication from the RADIUS server and use TACACS as a backup, issue the following commands. The following example shows enabling authentication from the RADIUS server. DellEMC(config)# aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs Radius and TACACS server has to be properly setup for this. DellEMC(config)# radius-server host x.x.x.
PAGE 781
Example: DellEMC(config)#aaa authentication login vty_auth_list radius Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? 3 You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate whenever there is a change in the RADIUS server list.. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host IP Address Example: DellEMC(config)#radius-server host 192.100.0.12 Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? DellEMC(config)#no radius-server host 192.100.0.
PAGE 782
Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network. However, at times, you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands. In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system. Every command in Dell EMC Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0, 1, or 15. You can configure up to 16 privilege levels in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 783
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] [privilege level][secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: – name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters long. – access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. – nopassword: Do not require the user to enter a password. – encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: Enter a string. – privilege level The range is from 0 to 15.
PAGE 784
CONFIGURATION mode username name [access-class access-list-name] [privilege level] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password Secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: 2 • name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters(maximum) long. • access-class access-list-name: Restrict access by access-class.. • privilege level: The range is from 0 to 15. • nopassword: No password is required for the user to log in. • encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text.
PAGE 785
DellEMC(conf)#privilege config level 8 snmp-server DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#show running-config Current Configuration ... ! hostname Force10 ! enable password level 8 notjohn enable password Force10 ! username admin password 0 admin username john password 0 john privilege 8 ! The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed.
PAGE 786
Configure the following optional and required parameters: – encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: Enter a text string up to 32 characters long. To view the password configured for a terminal, use the show config command in LINE mode. Enabling and Disabling Privilege Levels To enable and disable privilege levels, use the following commands. • Set a user’s security level.
PAGE 787
• ACL Configuration Information • Auto-Command • Privilege Levels After gaining authorization for the first time, you may configure these attributes. NOTE: RADIUS authentication/authorization is done for every login. There is no difference between first-time login and subsequent logins. Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout.
PAGE 788
Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
PAGE 789
login authentication {method-list-name | default} • This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists. To use the method list. CONFIGURATION mode authorization exec methodlist Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command.
PAGE 790
CONFIGURATION mode radius-server key [encryption-type] key – encryption-type: enter 7 to encrypt the password. Enter 0 to keep the password as plain text. • – key: enter a string. The key can be up to 42 characters long. You cannot use spaces in the key. Configure the number of times Dell EMC Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server retransmit retries • – retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3 retries.
PAGE 791
CONFIGURATION mode aaa radius auth-method mschapv2 3 Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host H key K 4 Log in to switch using console or telnet or ssh with a valid user role. When 1-factor authentication is used, the authentication succeeds enabling you to access the switch. When two-factor authentication is used, the system prompts you to enter a one-time password as a second step of authentication.
PAGE 792
Verify RADIUS attribute configuration Verify the attribute configuration using the show running-config command. DellEMC# show running-config ! radius-server host 10.16.206.77 key 7 387a7f2df5969da4 radius-server attribute 8 include-in-access-req radius-server attribute 168 include-in-access-req ! dot1x authentication ! RADIUS-assigned dynamic access control lists Dell EMC Networking OS supports RADIUS-assigned dynamic access control lists (DACLs) to control the traffic from authenticated supplicant.
PAGE 793
b UP the interface using no shutdown command Allocate CAM for RADIUS-assigned DACL Allocate the CAM region to use the RADIUS-assigned DACL. Reload the switch for the CAM allocation to take effect. To allocate a CAM region for RADIUS-assigned DACL, use the cam-acl command. Enter the radius-v4acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2,4,6,8). The maximum number of FP blocks allocated for RADIUS-assigned DACLs is 8.
PAGE 794
NOTE: The system displays error when both the filter-ID and RADIUS Filter Rule attributes are sent in the same RADIUS AccessAccept frame. RADIUS NAS-Filter-Rule attribute The switch or NAS saves the RADIUS-assigned DACL rules under a filter name derived from the supplicant MAC addresses. The NAS dynamically generates a filter for the rules downloaded through the RADIUS NAS-Filter-Rule attribute. The names of the downloaded filter rules have a prefix __Rad followed by the supplicant MAC addresses.
PAGE 795
seq 72 permit udp 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 eq 65535 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 eq 65535 ! Extended Ingress IP access list __Rad1_64883d1000 on GigabitEthernet 1/1(Radius-ACL) Total cam count 4 seq 5 permit ip host 100.0.0.1 host 150.0.0.100 count (0 packets) seq 10 deny ip host 100.0.0.1 host 100.0.0.2 count (0 packets) seq 15 permit ip host 100.0.0.10 host 150.0.0.100 count (0 packets) seq 20 deny ip host 100.0.0.10 host 100.0.0.
PAGE 796
Untagged VLAN id: ACL Name: Auth PAE State: Backend State: None __Rad_3_632426100 Authenticated Idle Filter-Id attribute The NAS dynamically applies the ACLs that are created using a OS9 CLI to a supplicant after authentication. Dell EMC Networking OS allows to apply the same filter for user ACL and RADIUS ACL on different interfaces. NOTE: It is not recommended to configure the same filter both as a user ACL and RADIUS ACL on an interface.
PAGE 797
seq 42 permit ip any host 150.0.0.100 dscp 63 ecn 3 seq 47 permit ip 100.0.0.0/28 200.0.0.0/23 seq 52 permit ip 100.0.0.0/16 any seq 57 permit icmp host 1.1.1.1 200.0.0.0/23 seq 62 permit icmp any 200.0.0.0/27 seq 67 permit icmp host 1.1.1.1 any seq 72 permit udp 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 eq 65535 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 eq 65535 ! Extended Ingress IP access list test1 on GigabitEthernet 2/1(Radius-ACL)Supplicant MAC-38:8f: 17:91:00:00 Total cam count 3 seq 5 permit ip host 10.10.10.10 host 20.20.20.
PAGE 798
Attributes In Disconnect messsage requests and CoA-Request packets, certain attributes are used to uniquely identify the NAS as well as user sessions on the NAS. The combination of NAS and session identification attributes included in a CoA-request or a disconnect-message request must match at least one session in order for a request to be successful; otherwise, a disconnect-Nak or CoA-Nak is sent.
PAGE 799
Attribute code Attribute Description • v=6027 (Force10);Vendor-Type=1(Force10-av-pair) Length = value Table 80. DM Attributes Attribute code Attribute Description 1 User-Name(Mandatory) Name of the user associated with one or more sessions. Mandatory attributes The following tables describe the mandatory attributes for various message types: Table 81.
PAGE 800
Table 83. CoA EAP/MAB Bounce Port Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory NAS Identification Attributes 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. No 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. No Port on which session is terminated Yes t=26(vendor-specific);l=length;vendor-identificationattribute;Length=value; Data=”cmd=bounce-host-port” Yes Session Identification Attributes 5 NAS-Port Authorization Attributes 26 Vendor-Specific Table 84.
PAGE 801
Error-cause Values It is possible that a Dynamic Authorization Server cannot honor Disconnect Message request or CoA request packets for some reason. The Error-Cause Attribute provides more detail on the cause of the problem. It may be included within CoA-Nak and Disconnect-Nak packets. The following table describes various error causes for the CoA and DM requests: Table 86.
PAGE 802
NOTE: The Invalid Attribute Value Error-Cause is applicable to following scenarios: – if the CoA request contains incorrect Vendor-Specific attribute value. – if the CoA request contains incorrect NAS-port or calling-station-id values. • rejects the CoA-Request containing NAS-IP-Address or NAS-IPV6-Address attribute that does not match the NAS with a CoA-Nak; Error-Cause value is “NAS Identification Mismatch” (403).
PAGE 803
Disconnect Message Processing This section lists various actions that the NAS performs during DM processing. The following activities are performed by NAS: • responds with DM-Nak, if no matching session is found in NAS for the session identification attributes in DM; Error-Cause value is “Session Context Not Found” (503). • responds with DM-Nak for any internal processing error in NAS; Error-Cause value is “Resources Unavailable” (506).
PAGE 804
client-key encryption-type key Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)client-key 7 password Disconnecting administrative users logged in through RADIUS Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to configure disconnect messages (DMs) to disconnect RADIUS administrative users who are logged in through an AAA interface. Before disconnecting an administrative user using the disconnect messages, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: • Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC.
PAGE 805
NAS disables the authentication port that is hosting the session and re-enables it after 10 seconds. All user sessions connected to this authentication port are affected. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)coa-bounce-port NAS takes the following actions whenever port-bounce is triggered: • validates the CoA request and the session identification attributes. • sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the CoA request does not contain the NAS-port attributes.
PAGE 806
• sends-ACK if user is configured with forced-authorization. Terminating the 802.1x user session Dell EMC Networking OS provides RADIUS extension commands that terminate the 802.1x user session. When this request is initiated, the NAS disconnects the 802.1x user session without disabling the physical port that authenticated the current session. Before terminating the 802.1x user session, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: • Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC.
PAGE 807
NAS administratively shuts down the 802.1x enabled port that is hosting the session. You can re-enable this port only through a nonRADIUS mechanism or through bounce-port request. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)coa-disable-port NAS takes the following actions: • validates the CoA request and the session identification attributes. • sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the CoA request does not contain the NAS-port attribute.
PAGE 808
NAS considers the new replay protection window value from next window period. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)replay-prot-window 10 Rate-limiting RADIUS packets NAS enables you to allow or reject RADIUS dynamic authorization packets based on the rate-limiting value that you specify. NAS lets you to configure number of RADIUS dynamic authorization packets allowed per minute. The default value is 30 packets per minute.
PAGE 809
To select TACACS+ as the login authentication method, use the following commands. 1 Configure a TACACS+ server host. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {ip-address | host} Enter the IP address or host name of the TACACS+ server. Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2 Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method.
PAGE 810
authentication success on vty0 ( 10.11.9.209 ) %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user admin on line vty0 (10.11.9.209) DellEMC(conf)#username angeline password angeline DellEMC(conf)#%RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user angeline on vty0 (10.11.9.209) %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-3-AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_SUCCESS: Enable password authentication success on vty0 ( 10.11.9.209 ) Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command.
PAGE 811
– key key: enter a string for the key. The key can be up to 42 characters long. This key must match a key configured on the TACACS+ server host. This parameter must be the last parameter you configure. If you do not configure these optional parameters, the default global values are applied. Example of Connecting with a TACACS+ Server Host To specify multiple TACACS+ server hosts, configure the tacacs-server host command multiple times.
PAGE 812
To use the SSH client, use the following command. • Open an SSH connection and specify the hostname, username, port number,encryption cipher,HMAC algorithm and version of the SSH client. EXEC Privilege mode ssh {hostname} [-l username | -p port-number | -v 2}| -c encryption cipher | -m HMAC algorithm • • hostname is the IP address or host name of the remote device. Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). SSH V2 is enabled by default on all the modes.
PAGE 813
copy scp: flash: Example of Using SCP to Copy from an SSH Server on Another Switch The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: • crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server. • debug ip ssh : enables collecting SSH debug information. • ip scp topdir : identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.
PAGE 814
• rekey-limit: volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes. Examples The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes.
PAGE 815
• hmac-sha2-256 The default HMAC algorithms are the following: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
PAGE 816
[no] ip ssh server dns enable To disable the DNS in the SSH server configuration, use the no version of this command. Example of DNS Configuration in SSH Server Connections To view the status of DNS in the SSH server configuration, use the show running-config ip ssh command from EXEC mode.
PAGE 817
no ip ssh password-authentication enable 4 Enable RSA authentication in SSH. CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication enable 5 Install user’s public key for RSA authentication in SSH. EXEC Privilege Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication username username my-authorized-keys flash://public_key If you provide the username, the Dell EMC Networking OS installs the public key for that specific user. In case, no user is associated with the current logged-in session, the system displays the following error message.
PAGE 818
Examples of Creating shosts and rhosts The following example shows creating shosts. admin@Unix_client# cd /etc/ssh admin@Unix_client# ls moduli sshd_config ssh_host_dsa_key.pub ssh_host_key.pub ssh_host_rsa_key.pub ssh_config ssh_host_dsa_key ssh_host_key ssh_host_rsa_key admin@Unix_client# cat ssh_host_rsa_key.
PAGE 819
If the IP address in the RSA key does not match the IP address from which you attempt to log in, the following message appears. In this case, verify that the name and IP address of the client is contained in the file /etc/hosts: RSA Authentication Error. Telnet To use Telnet with SSH, first enable SSH, as previously described. By default, the Telnet daemon is enabled. If you want to disable the Telnet daemon, use the following command, or disable Telnet in the startup config.
PAGE 820
access class. After users identify themselves, retrieves the access class from the local database and applies it. ( then can close the connection if a user is denied access.) NOTE: If a VTY user logs in with RADIUS authentication, the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server only if you configure RADIUS authentication. The following example shows how to allow or deny a Telnet connection to a user. Users see a login prompt even if they cannot log in. No access class is configured for the VTY line.
PAGE 821
DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class sourcemac DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end Role-Based Access Control With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function.
PAGE 822
NOTE: When you enter a user role, you have already been authenticated and authorized. You do not need to enter an enable password because you will be automatically placed in EXEC Priv mode. For greater security, the ability to view event, audit, and security system log is associated with user roles. For information about these topics, see Audit and Security Logs.
PAGE 823
exec-timeout 0 0 line vty 0 login authentication test authorization exec test line vty 1 login authentication test authorization exec test To enable role-based only AAA authorization, enter the following command in Configuration mode: DellEMC(conf)#aaa authorization role-only System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell EMC Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles.
PAGE 824
Creating a New User Role Instead of using the system defined user roles, you can create a new user role that best matches your organization. When you create a new user role, you can first inherit permissions from one of the system defined roles. Otherwise you would have to create a user role’s command permissions from scratch. You then restrict commands or add commands to that role NOTE: You can change user role permissions on system pre-defined user roles or user-defined user roles.
PAGE 825
Modifying Command Permissions for Roles You can modify (add or delete) command permissions for newly created user roles and system defined roles using the role mode { { { addrole | deleterole } role-name } | reset } command command in Configuration mode. NOTE: You cannot modify system administrator command permissions. If you add or delete command permissions using the role command, those changes only apply to the specific user role. They do not apply to other roles that have inheritance from that role.
PAGE 826
DellEMC(conf)#show role mode configure interface Role access: netadmin, secadmin, sysadmin Example: Verify that the Security Administrator Can Access Interface Mode The following example shows that the secadmin role can now access Interface mode (highlighted in bold).
PAGE 827
The following example deletes a user role. NOTE: If you already have a user ID that exists with a privilege level, you can add the user role to username that has a privilege DellEMC(conf)# no username john The following example adds a user, to the secadmin user role. DellEMC(conf)# username john role secadmin password 0 password AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles This section describes how to configure AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.
PAGE 828
To configure AAA authorization, use the aaa authorization exec command in CONFIGURATION mode. The aaa authorization exec command determines which CLI mode the user will start in for their session; for example, Exec mode or Exec Privilege mode. For information about how to configure authentication for roles, see Configure AAA Authentication for Roles.
PAGE 829
line vty 9 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa ! Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell EMC Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendor-specific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell EMC Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
PAGE 830
Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles To configure AAA accounting for roles, use the aaa accounting command in CONFIGURATION mode. aaa accounting {system | exec | commands {level | role role-name}} {name | default} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} Example of Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles The following example shows you how to configure AAA accounting to monitor commands executed by the users who have a secadmin user role.
PAGE 831
netadmin secadmin sysadmin testadmin netadmin Exec Exec Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Config Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Displaying Role Permissions Assigned to a Command To display permissions assigned to a command, use the show role command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays the user role and or permission level.
PAGE 832
• If the credentials are invalid, the authentication fails. NOTE: 2FA does not support RADIUS authentications done with REST, Web UI, and OMI. Handling Access-Challenge Message To provide a two-step verification in addition to the username and password, NAS prompts for additional information. An Access-Challenge request is sent from the RADIUS server to NAS.
PAGE 833
This module requires NAS for handling the access challenge from the RADIUS server. NAS sends the input OTP in an Access-Request to the RADIUS server, and the user authentication succeeds or fails depending upon the Access-Accept or Access-Reject response received at NAS from the RADIUS server. Configuring the System to Drop Certain ICMP Reply Messages You can configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages.
PAGE 834
Table 89.
PAGE 835
Important Points to Remember • The OS image verification feature is disabled by default on the Dell EMC Networking OS. • The OS image verification feature is supported for images stored in the local system only. • The OS image verification feature is not supported when the fastboot or the warmboot features are enabled on the system. • If OS image verification fails after a reload, the system does not load the startup configuration.
PAGE 836
Startup Configuration Verification Dell EMC Networking OS comes with startup configuration verification feature. When enabled, it checks the integrity of the startup configuration that the system uses while the system reboots and loads only if it is intact. Important Points to Remember • The startup configuration verification feature is disabled by default on the Dell EMC Networking OS. • The feature is supported for startup configuration files stored in the local system only.
PAGE 837
After enabling and configuring startup configuration verification, the device verifies the hash checksum of the startup configuration during every reload. DellEMC# verified boot hash startup—config 619A8C1B7A2BC9692A221E2151B9DA9E Configuring the root User Password For added security, you can change the root user password. If you configure the secure-cli command on the system, the Dell EMC Networking OS resets any previously-configured root access password without displaying any warning message.
PAGE 838
49 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell EMC Networking OS. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
PAGE 839
Figure 107. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
PAGE 840
2 Assign access and trunk ports to a VLAN (Creating Access and Trunk Ports). 3 Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN. Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands.
PAGE 841
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
PAGE 842
NOTE: You can add a trunk port to an 802.1Q VLAN as well as a Stacking VLAN only when the TPID 0x8100. 2 Add the port to a 802.1Q VLAN as tagged or untagged. INTERFACE VLAN mode [tagged | untagged] Example of Configuring a Trunk Port as a Hybrid Port and Adding it to Stacked VLANs In the following example, GigabitEthernet 1/1 is a trunk port that is configured as a hybrid port and then added to VLAN 100 as untagged VLAN 101 as tagged, and VLAN 103, which is a stacking VLAN.
PAGE 843
DellEMC#debug member port gigabitethernet 2/4 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) DellEMC# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes. In a VLAN-stacking network, after the frame is double tagged, the outer tag TPID must match the TPID of the next-hop system. While 802.1Q requires that the inner tag TPID is 0x8100, it does not require a specific value for the outer tag TPID.
PAGE 844
Figure 108.
PAGE 845
Figure 109.
PAGE 846
Figure 110. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch The following table details the outcome of matched and mismatched TPIDs in a VLAN-stacking network with the S-Series. Table 90. Behaviors for Mismatched TPID Network Position Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
PAGE 847
Network Position Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
PAGE 848
Honoring the Incoming DEI Value To honor the incoming DEI value, you must explicitly map the DEI bit to an Dell EMC Networking OS drop precedence. Precedence can have one of three colors. Precedence Description Green High-priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. Yellow Lower-priority packets that are treated as best-effort. Red Lowest-priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status).
PAGE 849
Gi 2/9 Gi 2/10 Yellow Yellow 0 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired. When an S-Tag is added to incoming customer frames, the 802.1p bits on the S-Tag may be configured statically for each customer or derived from the C-Tag using Dynamic Mode CoS. Dynamic Mode CoS maps the C-Tag 802.1p value to a S-Tag 802.1p value. Figure 111.
PAGE 850
Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3. All other packets will have outer dot1p 0 and hence are queued to Queue 1. They are therefore policed according to qos-policy-input 1.
PAGE 851
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
PAGE 852
Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: In Dell EMC Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell EMC Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
PAGE 853
Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN.
PAGE 854
4 Set a maximum rate at which the RPM processes BPDUs for L2PT. VLAN STACKING mode protocol-tunnel rate-limit The default is: no rate limiting. The range is from 64 to 320 kbps. Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.
PAGE 855
50 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
PAGE 856
• If the interface states are up and the sampling rate is not configured on the port, the default sampling rate is calculated based on the line speed. • If the interface states are shut down, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate. • If the global sampling rate is non-default, for example 256, and if the sampling rate is not configured on the interface, the sampling rate of the interface is the global non-default sampling rate, that is, 256.
PAGE 857
NOTE: Interface mode configuration takes priority. • To reset the maximum header size of a packet, use the following command [no] sflow max-header-size extended • View the maximum header size of a packet.
PAGE 858
Displaying Show sFlow Global To view sFlow statistics, use the following command. • Display sFlow configuration information and statistics. EXEC mode show sflow Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Global) The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled. DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
PAGE 859
Displaying Show sFlow on a Stack-unit To view sFlow statistics on a specified Stack-unit, use the following command. • Display sFlow configuration information and statistics on the specified interface.
PAGE 860
Back-Off Mechanism If the sampling rate for an interface is set to a very low value, the CPU can get overloaded with flow samples under high-traffic conditions. In such a scenario, a binary back-off mechanism gets triggered, which doubles the sampling-rate (halves the number of samples per second) for all interfaces. The backoff mechanism continues to double the sampling-rate until the CPU condition is cleared. This is as per sFlow version 5 draft.
PAGE 861
Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global extended information enabled: none 0 collectors configured 0 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 0 sFlow samples collected 0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell EMC Networking system does not export extended-gateway data.
PAGE 862
51 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
PAGE 863
• Transceiver Monitoring • Configuring SNMP context name Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
PAGE 864
DellEMC(conf)#snmp-server user snmpguy snmpmon 3 auth sha AArt61wq priv aes128 jntRR59a In this example, for a specified user and a group, the AES128-CFB algorithm, the authentication password to enable the server to receive packets from the host, and the privacy password to encode the message contents are configured. SHA authentication needs to be used with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm only when FIPS is enabled because SHA is then the only available authentication level.
PAGE 865
Important Points to Remember • Typically, 5-second timeout and 3-second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both LAN and WAN applications. If you experience a timeout with these values, increase the timeout value to greater than 3 seconds, and increase the retry value to greater than 2 seconds on your SNMP server. • User ACLs override group ACLs. Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell EMC Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models.
PAGE 866
• auth — password privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password authentication. • priv — password and privacy privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password and privacy privileges. To set up user-based security (SNMPv3), use the following commands. • Configure the user with view privileges only (no password or privacy privileges).
PAGE 867
Reading Managed Object Values You may only retrieve (read) managed object values if your management station is a member of the same community as the SNMP agent. Dell EMC Networking supports RFC 4001, Textual Conventions for Internet Work Addresses that defines values representing a type of internet address. These values display for ipAddressTable objects using the snmpwalk command. There are several UNIX SNMP commands that read data. • Read the value of a single managed object.
PAGE 868
Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP You may configure system contact and location information from the Dell EMC Networking system or from the management station using SNMP. To configure system contact and location information from the Dell EMC Networking system and from the management station using SNMP, use the following commands.
PAGE 869
• • Dell EMC Networking enterpriseSpecific environment traps — fan, supply, and temperature. Dell EMC Networking enterpriseSpecific protocol traps — bgp, ecfm, stp, and xstp. To configure the system to send SNMP notifications, use the following commands. 1 Configure the Dell EMC Networking system to send notifications to an SNMP server. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c |3] [community-string] To send trap messages, enter the keyword traps.
PAGE 870
RPM_STATE: RPM0 is in Standby State RPM_DOWN: RPM 0 down - hard reset RPM_DOWN: RPM 0 down - card removed HOT_FAILOVER: RPM Failover Completed SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 1 SFM_REMOVE: Removed SFM 1 MAJOR_SFM: Major alarm: Switch fabric down MAJOR_SFM_CLR: Major alarm cleared: Switch fabric up MINOR_SFM: MInor alarm: No working standby SFM MINOR_SFM_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: Working standby SFM present TASK SUSPENDED: SUSPENDED - svce:%d - inst:%d - task:%s RPM0-P:CP %CHMGR-2-CARD_PARITY_ERR ABNORMAL_TASK_TERM
PAGE 871
customer1 at Level 7 VLAN 1000 %ECFM-5-ECFM_RDI_ALARM: RDI Defect detected by MEP 3 in Domain customer1 at Level 7 VLAN 1000 entity Enable entity change traps Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1487406) 4:07:54.06, SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 4 Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1488564) 4:08:05.64, SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
PAGE 872
The following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is lost: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (19738) 0:03:17.38 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID. 0 = OID: SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1 = STRING: "NOT_REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
PAGE 873
MIB Object OID Object Values Description 6 = usbflash copySrcFileName copyDestFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5 Path (if the file is not in the current directory) and filename. Specifies name of the file. 1 = Dell EMC Networking OS file Specifies the type of file to copy to. 2 = running-config 3 = startup-config • • • copyDestFileLocation .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
PAGE 874
Copying a Configuration File To copy a configuration file, use the following commands. NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using the following commands. Place the f10-copy-config.mib file in the directory from which you are executing the snmpset command or in the snmpset tool path. 1 Create an SNMP community string with read/write privileges. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community community-name rw 2 Copy the f10-copy-config.
PAGE 875
The following example shows copying configuration files using MIB object names. > snmpset -v 2c -r 0 -t 60 -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.101 i 2 copyDestFileType.101 i 3 FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.101 = INTEGER: runningConfig(2) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileType.101 = INTEGER: startupConfig(3) The following example shows copying configuration files using OIDs. > snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2.
PAGE 876
FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyUserName.110 = STRING: mylogin FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyUserPassword.110 = STRING: mypass Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via TFTP To copy the startup-config to the server via TFTP from the UNIX machine, use the following command. NOTE: Verify that the file exists and its permissions are set to 777. Specify the relative path to the TFTP root directory. • Copy the startup-config to the server via TFTP from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m .
PAGE 877
MIB Object OID Values Description copyTimeCompleted .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.13 Time value Specifies the point in the uptime clock that the copy operation completed. copyFailCause .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.14 1 = bad filename Specifies the reason the copy request failed. 2 = copy in progress 3 = disk full 4 = file exists 5 = file not found 6 = timeout 7 = unknown copyEntryRowStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.15 Row status Specifies the state of the copy operation.
PAGE 878
The following command shows how to get a MIB object value using OID. > snmpget -v 2c -c private 10.11.131.140 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.13.110 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.13.110 = Timeticks: (1179831) 3:16:38.31 MIB Support to Display Reason for Last System Reboot Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the reason for the last system reboot. The dellNetProcessorResetReason object contains the reason for the last system reboot. The following table lists the related MIB objects.
PAGE 879
SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5.10 = INTEGER: 48 snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6.10 = INTEGER: 31 snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.7 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.7.
PAGE 880
MIB Object OID Description chSysCoresTimeCreated 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.3 Contains the time at which core files are created. chSysCoresStackUnitNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.4 Contains information that includes which stack unit or processor the core file was originated from. chSysCoresProcess 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5 Contains information that includes the process names that generated each core file.
PAGE 881
MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpWredOutOfProfileDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.31 Count of WRED drops of red packets. SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.151.246 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3 | grep 2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.1.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.2.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.3.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.4.
PAGE 882
MIB Object OID Description dellNetFlashPartitionUsed 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4 Contains the amount of space used by the files on the partition. dellNetFlashPartitionFree 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5 Contains the amount of free space available on the partition. dellNetFlashPartitionMountPoint 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6 Symbolic or Alias name for the partition.
PAGE 883
.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.4 = STRING: "/f10/flash" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.5 = STRING: "/f10/phonehome" MIB Support to Display Egress Queue Statistics Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the packets transmitted or dropped per unicast or multicast egress queue. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 103. MIB Objects to display egress queue statistics MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpEgrQTxPacketsRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.20.1.
PAGE 884
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.1.32.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.
PAGE 885
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.20.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.1.32.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.
PAGE 886
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.7.0 = Gauge32: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.8.0 = Gauge32: 2047 MIB Support for entAliasMappingTable Dell EMC Networking provides a method to map the physical interface to its corresponding ifindex value. The entAliasMappingTable table contains zero or more rows, representing the logical entity mapping and physical component to external MIB identifiers. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 105.
PAGE 887
Table 106. MIB Objects for LAG MIB Object OID Description lagMIB 1.2.840.10006.300.43 Contains information about link aggregation module for managing 802.3ad. lagMIBObjects 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1 dot3adAgg 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1 dot3adAggTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1 Contains information about every Aggregator that is associated with a system. dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator.
PAGE 888
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggPortListTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2 Contains a list of all the ports associated with each Aggregator. Each LACP channel in a device occupies an entry in the table. dot3adAggPortListEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1 Contains a list of ports associated with a given Aggregator and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggPortListPorts 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1.1 Contains a complete set of ports currently associated with the Aggregator.
PAGE 889
Viewing the Details of Reserved Unrecognized LLDP TLVs • To view the information of reserved unrecognized LLDP TLVs using SNMP, use the following commands. snmpwalk -v2c -c mycommunity 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.2113029.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.3161092.6 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.3161605.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.4209668.6 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.4210181.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.
PAGE 890
MIB Object OID Description identify a particular unrecognized organizationally defined information instance. lldpRemOrgDefInfo 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4 Contains the string value used to identify the organizationally defined information of the remote system. Viewing the Details of Organizational Specific Unrecognized LLDP TLVs • To view the information of organizational specific unrecognized LLDP TLVs using SNMP, use the following commands. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.
PAGE 891
MIB support for interface level port security The MIB table dellNetPortSecIfConfigTable is used to achieve port security feature (MAC address learning limit) on an interface. NOTE: Port Security is not supported in VLT port channels. The following table shows the MIB objects of the table dellNetPortSecIfConfigTable. The OID of the MIB table is 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1. Table 110.
PAGE 892
To configure dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacLimit as 100 on an interface whose ifIndex is 2101252, use the following command. snmpset –v 2c –c public 10.16.129.26 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3. 2101252 i 100 To remove dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacLimit configuration on an interface whose ifIndex is 2101252, use the following command. snmpset –v 2c –c public 10.16.129.26 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3.
PAGE 893
MIB objects for configuring MAC addresses This section describes about the MIB table dellNetPortSecSecureMacAddrTable that contains the MAC database of the system. The table is indexed by the following parameters: • MAC Address (Octet string of length 6 and MAC address ( in decimal) as value • VLAN ID Table 112. MIB Objects for configuring MAC addresses MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetSecureMacIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.
PAGE 894
SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.
PAGE 895
Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM Status Description 10 Inactive Q Ports U Gi 1/2 [Unix system output] > snmpget -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 = Hex-STRING: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The value 40 is in the first set of 7 hex pairs, indicating that these ports are in Stack Unit 1.
PAGE 896
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.
PAGE 897
Fetch Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Dell EMC Networking supports the RFC 1493 dot1d table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs. NOTE: The 802.1q Q-BRIDGE MIB defines VLANs regarding 802.1d, as 802.1d itself does not define them. As a switchport must belong a VLAN (the default VLAN or a configured VLAN), all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN. For this reason, the Q-Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query.
PAGE 898
Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port-Channel Using SNMP Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number.
PAGE 899
particular VRF instance without having to be mapped to a community map. SNMPv2c context has to be mapped to a community map. A new CLI command, snmp context, under BGP context, has been introduced to perform this function. To map the context to a VRF instance for SNMPv2c, follow these steps: 1 2 Create a community and map a VRF to it. Create a context and map the context and community, to a community map.
PAGE 900
• router bgp 100 • address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 • snmp context context1 • neighbor 20.1.1.1 remote-as 200 • neighbor 20.1.1.1 no shutdown • exit-address-family • address-family ipv4 vrf vrf2 • snmp context context2 • timers bgp 30 90 • neighbor 30.1.1.1 remote-as 200 • neighbor 30.1.1.1 no shutdown • exit-address-family Example of SNMP Walk Output for BGP timer configured for vrf1 (SNMPv2c) snmpwalk -v 2c -c vrf1 10.16.131.125 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20.1.2.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.
PAGE 901
dot3aCommonAggFdbIndex SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.1.1107755009.1 dot3aCommonAggFdbVlanId SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.2.1107755009.1 dot3aCommonAggFdbTagConfig SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.3.1107755009.1 dot3aCommonAggFdbStatus SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.4.1107755009.
PAGE 902
To enable an SNMP agent to send a trap when the syslog server is not reachable, enter the following command: CONFIGURATION MODE snmp-server enable traps snmp syslog-unreachable To enable an SNMP agent to send a trap when the syslog server resumes connectivity, enter the following command: CONFIGURATION MODE snmp-server enable traps snmp syslog-reachable Table 115. List of Syslog Server MIBS that have read access MIB Object OID Object Values Description dF10SysLogTraps 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.30.1.
PAGE 903
Transceiver Monitoring To retrieve and display the transceiver related parameters you can perform a snmpwalk transceiver table OID to retrieve transceiver details as per the MIB. This enables transceiver monitoring and identification of potential issues related to the transceivers on a switch. • Ensure that SNMP is enabled on the device before running a query to retrieve the transceiver information.
PAGE 904
Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.16 Temperature SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.17 Volltage SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.18 Transmit Bias Current Lane1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.19 Transmit Bias Current Lane2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.20 Transmit Bias Current Lane3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
PAGE 905
52 Stacking Using the Dell EMC Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports . The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 1 to 12 and it supports stacking up to twelve units.
PAGE 906
Stack Management Roles The stack elects the management units for the stack management. • Stack master — primary management unit, also called the master unit. • Standby — secondary management unit. • Stack units — the remaining units in the stack, also called stack members. The system supports up to twelve stack units. The master holds the control plane and the other units maintain a local copy of the forwarding databases.
PAGE 907
Up Time : 43 min, 41 sec Dell Networking OS Version : 1-0(0-4679) Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : no FIPS Mode : disabled Burned In MAC : f8:10:20:30:40:97 No Of MACs : 3 -- Module 1 -Status : not present -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up UNKNOWN up 0 1 2 absent absent 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed ----------------------------------------------------------------------
PAGE 908
POE Capable FIPS Mode Burned In MAC No Of MACs : : : : no disabled f8:12:23:45:56:78 3 -- Module 1 -Status : not present -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------3 1 absent absent 0 3 2 up AC up 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 1 up up 6956 up 7058 Speed in RPM -- Unit 4 -Unit Type : Member Unit Stat
PAGE 909
When an up and running standalone unit or stack is merged with another stack, based on election, the losing stack reloads and the master unit of the winning stack becomes the master of the merged stack. For more details, see sectionsAdd Units to an Existing Stack and Remove a Unit from a Stack. It is possible to reset individual units to force them to give up the management role or reload the whole stack from the CLI to ensure a fully synchronized bootup.
PAGE 910
12 12 1 2 up down AC up UNKNOWN absent NA NA -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 7164 up 7058 2 1 up up 6956 up 7058 3 1 up up 7164 up 7058 4 1 up up 7058 up 7164 5 1 up up 7058 up 6956 6 1 up up 7058 up 7164 7 1 up up 12307 down 0 8 1 up up 7164 up 7164 9 1 up up 7058 up 7058 10 1 up up 7164 up 7058 11 1 up up 7058 up 7058 12 1 up up 7164 up 7058 Speed in RPM DellEMC# Virtual IP You can m
PAGE 911
Example of Adding a Standalone with a Lower MAC Address to a Stack ----------STANDALONE BEFORE CONNECTION--------------Standalone#show system brief Stack MAC Reload-Type : f8:b1:56:29:fc:21 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Member not present 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Management online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 5 Member not presen
PAGE 912
--------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 not present No Module 0 2 1 not present No Module 0 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 down UNKNOWN down 0 1 2 up AC up 7728 2 1 absent absent 0 2 2 up AC up 8032 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 6666 up 7058 2
PAGE 913
9 10 11 12 Member Member Member Member not not not not present present present present -- Module Info -Unit Module No Status Module Type Ports --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 not present No Module 0 2 1 not present No Module 0 4 1 not present No Module 0 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 down UNKNOWN down 0 1 2 up AC up 7728 2 1 absent absent 0 2 2 up
PAGE 914
Figure 114. Supported Stacking Topologies High Availability on Stacks Stacks have master and standby management units analogous to Dell EMC Networking route processor modules (RPM). The master unit synchronizes the running configuration and protocol states so that the system fails over in the event of a hardware or software fault on the master unit. In such an event, or when the master unit is removed, the standby unit becomes the stack manager and Dell EMC Networking OS elects a new standby unit.
PAGE 915
Stack-unit State: Stack-unit SW Version: Link to Peer: Active 1-0(0-4697) Up -- PEER Stack-unit Status ------------------------------------------------Stack-unit State: Standby Peer Stack-unit ID: 2 Stack-unit SW Version: 1-0(0-4697) -- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration ------------------------------------------------Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 1 Auto Data Sync: Full Failover Type: Hot Failover Auto reboot Stack-unit: Enabled Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes -- Stack-unit Failover Record -----
PAGE 916
ssh-peer-stack-unit start telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal upload Dell(standby)# Open a SSH connection to the peer stack-unit Start shell Open a telnet connection to the peer stack-unit Set terminal line parameters Upload file -----------------CONSOLE ACCESS ON A MEMBER---------------------------Dell(stack-member-1)#? reset-self Reset this unit alone show Show running system information You can connect two units with two or more stacking cables in case of a stacking port or cable failure.
PAGE 917
stack-unit stack—unit—number priority priority 5 Connect the units using stacking cables. NOTE: There are two fixed mini-SAS stacking connectors on the PSU side. You can connect mini-SAS cables between units to form stacking. 6 Reload the stack one unit at a time. EXEC Privilege mode show system brief Start with the management unit, then the standby, then each of the members in order of their assigned stack number (or the position in the stack you want each unit to take).
PAGE 918
Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Member online S3124F S3124F 1-0(0-4679) 30 2 Member online S3124 S3124 1-0(0-4679) 30 3 Member online S3124 S3124 1-0(0-4679) 30 4 Member online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 5 Standby online S3148 S3148 1-0(0-4679) 54 6 Member online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 7 Member online S3124F S3124F 1-0(0-4679)
PAGE 919
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 up up up up up up up up up up up up up up up up 7058 7058 12307 7164 7058 7164 7058 7164 up up down up up up up up 6956 7164 0 7164 7058 7058 7058 7058 Speed in RPM DellEMC# Add Units to an Existing Stack You can add units to an existing stack in one of three ways. • By manually assigning a new unconfigured unit a position in an existing stack. • By adding a configured unit to an existing stack. • By merging two stacks.
PAGE 920
-- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports --------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Management online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 2 Standby online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present 6 Member not present 7 Member not present 8 Member not present 9 Member not present 10 Member not present 11 Member not present 12 Member not present -- Module Info -Unit Module No Status Module Type Ports ----
PAGE 921
-- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up AC up 7888 1 2 down UNKNOWN absent NA 2 1 up AC up NA 2 2 absent absent NA 4 1 absent absent 0 4 2 up AC up 7888 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 7164 up 7058 2 1 up up 6956 up 7058 4 1 up up 7058 up 7164 Speed in RPM Dell# Adding a Configured Unit
PAGE 922
Split a Stack To split a stack, unplug the desired stacking cables. You may do this at any time, whether the stack is powered or unpowered, and the units are online or offline. Each portion of the split stack retains the startup and running configuration of the original stack. For a parent stack that is split into two child stacks, A and B, each with multiple units: • If one of the new stacks receives the master and the standby management units, it is unaffected by the split.
PAGE 923
stack-unit stack-unit-number provision S4048–ON Displaying Information about a Stack To display information about the stack, use the following command. • Display for stack-identity, status, and hardware information on every unit in a stack. EXEC Privilege mode • show system Display most of the information in show system, but in a more convenient tabular form. EXEC Privilege mode • show system brief Display the same information in show system, but only for the specified unit.
PAGE 924
1 1 up up 7058 up 7058 Speed in RPM -- Unit 2 -Unit Type : Standby Unit Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : S3124 - 28-port GE/TE (S3100) Current Type : S3124 - 28-port GE/TE (S3100) Master priority : 13 Hardware Rev : 5.
PAGE 925
Speed in RPM The following is an example of the show system brief command to view the stack summary information.
PAGE 926
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 7164 up 6956 2 1 up up 7058 up 7058 3 1 up up 6956 up 7058 4 1 up up 6956 up 6956 5 1 up up 7058 up 7058 6 1 up up 7058 up 7164 7 1 up up 12000 down 0 8 1 up up 7164 up 7164 9 1 up up 7058 up 7058 10 1 up up 6956 up 7164 11 1 up up 7164 up 7164 12 1 up up 7058 up 7058 Speed in RPM DellEMC# The following example shows the show system stack-ports command.
PAGE 927
selects a new standby unit based on the unit priority using the same algorithm used when the stack was initially created. When the failed unit recovers, it takes the next available role, usually that of a stack member. • Influence the selection of the stack management units. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit unit-number priority priority-value The unit with the numerically highest priority is elected the master management unit, and the unit with the second highest priority is the standby unit.
PAGE 928
reset stack-unit unit-number {hard} Verify a Stack Configuration The light of the LED status indicator on the front panel of the stack identifies the unit’s role in the stack. • Off indicates the unit is a stack member. • Solid green indicates the unit is the stack master (management unit). Displaying the Status of Stacking Ports To display the status of the stacking ports, including the topology, use the following command. • Display the stacking ports.
PAGE 929
Up Time : 2 hr, 56 min Dell Networking OS Version : 1-0(0-4697) Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : yes FIPS Mode : disabled Boot Flash : 5.2.1.
PAGE 930
8 9 10 11 12 Member Member Member Member Member not not not not not present present present present present -- Module Info -Unit Module No Status Module Type Ports --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 online S3148P-10GE-2X10BaseT 2 2 1 online S3148P-10GE-2SFP+ 2 3 1 online S3148P-10GE-2X10BaseT 2 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up AC up 7888 1 2 down UNKN
PAGE 931
2 1 up AC up NA 2 2 absent absent NA 3 1 absent absent 0 3 2 up AC up 7888 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 1 up up 6956 up 7058 3 1 up up 7058 up 7164 Speed in RPM DellEMC# NOTE: Each unit in the stack has a stack number that is either assigned by you or Dell EMC Networking OS. To manually renumber stack members, use the stack-unit old-unit-number renumber new-unit-number command.
PAGE 932
Example of Card Problem Error on a Stack - Different Dell EMC Networking OS Versions DellEMC#show system brief Stack MAC Reload-Type : 34:17:17:18:19:1e : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Management online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 2 Standby online S3148P S3148P 1-0(0-4679) 54 3 Member not present S3124F 4 Member card problem S3148P unknown 5 Memb
PAGE 933
53 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The minimum number of packets per second (PPS) that storm control can limit on the device is two.
PAGE 934
• Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets. It can be a result of a faulty NIC/Switch that sends spurious PFC/LLFC packets. Configuring Storm Control from CONFIGURATION Mode To configure storm control from CONFIGURATION mode, use the following command.
PAGE 935
54 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 936
Configure Spanning Tree Configuring spanning tree is a two-step process.
PAGE 937
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 116. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
PAGE 938
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
PAGE 939
no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 940
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
PAGE 941
• Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally.
PAGE 942
• Enable PortFast on an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree stp-id portfast [bpduguard | [shutdown-on-violation]] Example of Verifying PortFast is Enabled on an Interface To verify that PortFast is enabled on a port, use the show spanning-tree command from EXEC Privilege mode or the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell EMC Networking recommends using the show config command.
PAGE 943
Figure 118. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: • • is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
PAGE 944
The secondary option specifies a bridge priority of 16384. The default is 32768. Example of Viewing STP Root Information To view only the root information, use the show spanning-tree root command from EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show spanning-tree 0 root Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e80d.2462 We are the root of the spanning tree Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 DellEMC# STP Root Guard Use the STP root guard feature in a Layer 2 network to avoid bridging loops.
PAGE 945
Figure 119. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: • Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
PAGE 946
– mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. – rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. – pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port. To disable STP root guard on a port or port-channel interface, use the no spanning-tree 0 rootguard command in an interface configuration mode. To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode.
PAGE 947
As shown in the following illustration (STP topology 2, upper right), a loop can also be created if the forwarding port on Switch B becomes busy and does not forward BPDUs within the configured forward-delay time. As a result, the blocking port on Switch C transitions to a forwarding state, and both Switch A and Switch C transmit traffic to Switch B (STP topology 2, lower right).
PAGE 948
• Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface. • Loop guard is supported on a port or port-channel in any spanning tree mode: – Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) – Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) • You cannot enable root guard and loop guard at the same time on an STP port.
PAGE 949
55 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 121.
PAGE 950
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
PAGE 951
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
PAGE 952
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now DellEMC#support-assist activity full-transfer start now DellEMC#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity.
PAGE 953
action-manifest remove DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
PAGE 954
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
PAGE 955
[no] server server-name DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#server default DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 2 Configure a proxy for reaching the SupportAssist remote server. SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.
PAGE 956
show running-config support-assist DellEMC# show running-config support-assist ! support-assist enable all ! activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.
PAGE 957
56 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
PAGE 958
Following conventions established by the telephone industry [BEL86], the accuracy of each server is defined by a number called the stratum, with the topmost level (primary servers) assigned as one and each level downwards (secondary servers) in the hierarchy assigned as one greater than the preceding level. Dell EMC Networking OS synchronizes with a time-serving host to get the correct time. You can set Dell EMC Networking OS to poll specific NTP time-serving hosts for the current time.
PAGE 959
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell EMC Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times. You may specify an unlimited number of servers at the expense of CPU resources. • Specify the NTP server to which the Dell EMC Networking system synchronizes.
PAGE 960
Disabling NTP on an Interface By default, NTP is enabled on all active interfaces. If you disable NTP on an interface, Dell EMC Networking OS drops any NTP packets sent to that interface. To disable NTP on an interface, use the following command. • Disable NTP on the interface. INTERFACE mode ntp disable To view whether NTP is configured on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If ntp disable is not listed in the show config command output, NTP is enabled.
PAGE 961
To configure NTP authentication, use the following commands. 1 Enable NTP authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authenticate 2 Set an authentication key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authentication-key number {md5 | sha1} key Configure the following parameters: 3 • number: the range is from 1 to 65534. This number must be the same as the number in the ntp trusted-key command. • key: enter a text string. This text string is encrypted. Define a trusted key.
PAGE 962
ntp server 10.16.127.144 Dell EMC (conf)# Dell EMC#show ntp associations remote vrf-Id ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp ==================================================================================== LOCAL(0) 0 .LOCL. 7 7 16 7 0.000 0.000 0.002 10.16.127.86 0 10.16.127.26 5 3 16 7 0.498 361.760 0.184 10.16.127.144 0 10.16.127.26 5 1 16 7 0.492 359.171 0.219 10.16.127.44 0 10.16.127.26 5 5 16 7 0.498 355.501 0.
PAGE 963
Configuring NTP control key password The Network Time Protocal daemon (NTPD) design uses NTPQ to configure NTPD. NTP control key supports encrypted and unencrypted password options. The ntp control-key- passwd command authenticates NTPQ packets. The default control-key-passwd authenticates the NTPQ packets until the user changes the control-key using the ntp control-key- passwd command. To configure NTP control key password, use the following command. Configure NTP control key password.
PAGE 964
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
PAGE 965
– end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. – end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. – end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. – offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
PAGE 966
Examples of the clock summer-time recurring Command The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring command.
PAGE 967
57 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
PAGE 968
tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
PAGE 969
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered gigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered gigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
PAGE 970
! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.
PAGE 971
58 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. Feature Description A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices, such as servers. If a switch loses its upstream connectivity, downstream devices also lose their connectivity.
PAGE 972
Figure 123. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
PAGE 973
Figure 124. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
PAGE 974
• • • If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
PAGE 975
4 (Optional) Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in the uplink-state group come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream auto-recover The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5 (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group.
PAGE 976
3/50 02:36:43: 3/51 02:36:43: 02:36:43: 02:36:43: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Downstream interface set to UFD error-disabled: Te %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 3/49 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 3/50 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 3/51 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_DN: Changed interface Admin state to down: Gi 1/7 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: G
PAGE 977
– group-id: The values are from 1 to 16. Examples of Viewing UFD Information (S50) The following example shows viewing the uplink state group status.
PAGE 978
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:01:23 The following example shows viewing the UFD configuration.
PAGE 979
DellEMC# 00:13:06: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console DellEMC# show running-config uplink-state-group ! uplink-state-group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 downstream GigabitEthernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 upstream GigabitEthernet 1/3-4 DellEMC# show uplink-state-group 3 Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up DellEMC# show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled
PAGE 980
59 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
PAGE 981
60 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
PAGE 982
Default VLAN When you configure interfaces for Layer 2 mode, they are automatically placed in the Default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the Default VLAN. The following example displays the outcome of placing an interface in Layer 2 mode. To configure an interface for Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command.
PAGE 983
VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN, the interface must be in Layer 2 mode. After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN. supports IEEE 802.1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic. When you enable tagging, a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses. That information is preserved as the frame moves through the network.
PAGE 984
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 985
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/2 DellEMC#config DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 4 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#end DellEMC#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T 4 Active T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/2 Po1(So
PAGE 986
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 Status Active Active 3 Active Q U T T T T Ports Gi 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/3 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/1 4 Inactive DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 4 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#untagged gigabitethernet 1/2 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged GigabitEthernet 1/2 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#end DellEMC#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 Status Q Inactive Active T T Active T T Active U Ports Po
PAGE 987
Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports. Physical and port-channel interfaces may be hybrid ports. Native VLAN is useful in deployments where a Layer 2 port can receive both tagged and untagged traffic on the same physical port. The classic example is connecting a voice-over-IP (VOIP) phone and a PC to the same port of the switch.
PAGE 988
61 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) is a Dell EMC technology that provides two Dell EMC switches the ability to function as a single switch. VLT allows physical links between two Dell EMC switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices.
PAGE 989
Figure 127. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
PAGE 990
Figure 128. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: • Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. • Eliminates STP-blocked ports. • Provides a loop-free topology. • Uses all available uplink bandwidth. • Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. • Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). • Provides link-level resiliency. • Assures high availability. • Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
PAGE 991
VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches.
PAGE 992
Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains In a VLT domain, the MAC address of any host connected to the VLT peers is synchronized between the VLT nodes. In the following example, VLAN 10 is spanned across three VLT domains. Figure 129. Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains If Host 1 from a VLT domain sends a frame to Host 2 in another VLT domain, the frame can use any link shown to reach Host 2.
PAGE 993
30 30 30 30 30 30 a0:00:a1:00:00:07 a0:00:a1:00:00:08 a0:00:a1:00:00:09 a0:00:a1:00:00:0a a0:00:a1:00:00:0b a0:00:a1:00:00:0c Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active Po 11 Active VLT-10-PEER-2#show vlt statistics mac VLT MAC Statistics -------------------L2 Info Pkts sent:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:7 L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:9 L2 Reg Request sent:0 L2 Reg Request rcvd:0 L2 Reg Response sent:0 L2
PAGE 994
Figure 130. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer. For better resiliency in the aggregation, Dell EMC Networking recommends running the internal gateway protocol (IGP) on the VLTi VLAN to synchronize the L3 routing table across the two nodes on a VLT system. Enhanced VLT Enhanced VLT (eVLT)) refers to the ability to connect two VLT domains.
PAGE 995
Figure 131. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • • • • • • • • • • • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior can occur. VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT.
PAGE 996
• BMP uses untagged dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) packets to communicate with the DHCP server. • o disable this feature on VLT and port channels, use no lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | port-channel} command under the configuration mode. • When you enable IGMP snooping on the VLT peers, ensure the value of the delay-restore command is not less than the query interval.
PAGE 997
– A VLT domain supports two chassis members, which appear as a single logical device to network access devices connected to VLT ports through a port channel. – A VLT domain consists of the two core chassis, the interconnect trunk, backup link, and the LAG members connected to attached devices. – Each VLT domain has a unique MAC address that you create or VLT creates automatically. – ARP tables are synchronized between the VLT peer nodes.
PAGE 998
– If the size of the MTU for VLTi members is less than 1496 bytes, MAC addresses may not synchronize between VLT peers. Dell EMC Networking does not recommend using an MTU size lower than the default of 1554 bytes for VLTi members. • VLT backup link – In the backup link between peer switches, heartbeat messages are exchanged between the two chassis for health checks. The default time interval between heartbeat messages over the backup link is 1 second. You can configure this interval.
PAGE 999
• Software features supported on VLT physical ports – In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on VLT physical ports: 802.1p, LLDP, flow control, IPv6 dynamic routing, port monitoring, DHCP snooping, and jumbo frames. • Software features not supported with VLT – In a VLT domain, the following software features are not supported on VLT ports: 802.1x, GVRP, and BFD.
PAGE 1000
RSTP and VLT VLT provides loop-free redundant topologies and does not require RSTP. RSTP can cause temporary port state blocking and may cause topology changes after link or node failures. Spanning tree topology changes are distributed to the entire layer 2 network, which can cause a network-wide flush of learned MAC and ARP addresses, requiring these addresses to be re-learned. However, enabling RSTP can detect potential loops caused by non-system issues such as cabling errors or incorrect configurations.
PAGE 1001
VLT IPv6 The following features have been enhanced to support IPv6: • VLT Sync — Entries learned on the VLT interface are synced on both VLT peers. • Non-VLT Sync — Entries learned on non-VLT interfaces are synced on both VLT peers. • Tunneling — Control information is associated with tunnel traffic so that the appropriate VLT peer can mirror the ingress port as the VLT interface rather than pointing to the VLT peer’s VLTi link.
PAGE 1002
Figure 132. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
PAGE 1003
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
PAGE 1004
Figure 133. Packets without peer routing enabled If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 134. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing • • Avoids sub-optimal routing • Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
PAGE 1005
• You can reduce the number of VLTi port channel members based on your specific design. With peer routing, you need not configure VRRP for the participating VLANs. As both VLT nodes act as a gateway for its peer, irrespective of the gateway IP address, the traffic flows upstream without any latency. There is no limitation for the number of VLANS. VLT Unicast Routing VLT unicast routing is a type of VLT peer routing that locally routes unicast packets destined for the L3 endpoint of the VLT peer.
PAGE 1006
The advantages of syncing the multicast routes between VLT peers are: • VLT resiliency — After a VLT link or peer failure, if the traffic hashes to the VLT peer, the traffic continues to be routed using multicast until the PIM protocol detects the failure and adjusts the multicast distribution tree. • Optimal routing — The VLT peer that receives the incoming traffic can directly route traffic to all downstream routers connected on VLT ports.
PAGE 1007
NOTE: ARP entries learned on non-VLT, non-spanned VLANs are not synced with VLT peers. RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use RSTP for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. For information about how to configure RSTP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Run RSTP on both VLT peer switches.
PAGE 1008
Configure RSTP on VLT peers to prevent forwarding loops—VLT peer 1 (primary) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 Configure RSTP on VLT peers to prevent forwarding loops—VLT peer 2 (secondary) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 8192 NOTE: When you remove the VLT configuration, RSTP is recommended as a backup solution to avoid
PAGE 1009
CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2 Remove any IP address from the interface if already present. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel.
PAGE 1010
You can optionally specify the time interval used to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. 3 Configure the port channel to be used as the VLT interconnect between VLT peers in the domain. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 4 Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer.
PAGE 1011
4 Configure a VLT backup link using the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the VLT peer’s management interface. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode back-up destination {ip address ipv4-address/ mask | ipv6 address ipv6-address/ mask} 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 on the VLT peer switch. To set an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the system from restoring the VLT port, use the delay-restore command at any time. For more information, refer to VLT Port Delayed Restoration.
PAGE 1012
Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to synchronize the default MAC address of the VLT domain on both peer switches when one peer switch reboots. 4 (Optional) When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode unit-id {0 | 1} To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the unit-id command.
PAGE 1013
8 On an attached switch or server: To connect to the VLT domain and add port channels to it, configure a port channel. For an example of how to verify the port-channel configuration, refer to VLT Sample Configuration. To configure the VLAN where a VLT peer forwards received packets over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peerdown-vlan parameter. When a VLT peer with BMP reboots, untagged DHCP discover packets are sent to the peer over the VLTi.
PAGE 1014
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 5 Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode back-up destination ip-address [interval seconds] You can optionally specify the time interval used to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds.
PAGE 1015
12 Add links to the eVLT port. Configure a range of interfaces to bulk configure. CONFIGURATION mode interface range {port-channel id} 13 Enable LACP on the LAN port. INTERFACE mode port-channel-protocol lacp 14 Configure the LACP port channel mode. INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15 Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 16 Enable peer routing.
PAGE 1016
7 Configure the peer 1 management ip/ interface ip for which connectivity is present in VLT peer 1. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface 8 Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the top of rack unit (shown in the following example). 9 Configure the static LAG/LACP between ports connected from VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the top of rack unit.
PAGE 1017
Dell-2# show interfaces managementethernet 1/1 Internet address is 10.11.206.43/16 Dell-4#show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 5 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.11.206.43 Dell-4# Dell-4#show running-config interface managementethernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.206.58/16 no shutdown Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit.
PAGE 1018
! interface Port-channel 100 no ip address switchport no shutdown s60-1#show interfaces port-channel 100 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 100 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 03:33:48 Ports Gi 1/8 (Up) Gi 1/30 (Up) Verify VLT is up. Verify that the VLTi (ICL) link, backup link connectivity (heartbeat status), and VLT peer link (peer chassis) are all up.
PAGE 1019
Sample PVST+ Configuration The following examples show the PVST+ configuration that you must perform on each peer switch to prevent forwarding loops.
PAGE 1020
Figure 135. Peer Routing Configuration Example Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. DellEMC#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
PAGE 1021
The following is the configuration in interfaces: DellEMC#1#sh run int ma0/0 interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 description Used_for_VLT_Keepalive ip address 10.10.10.1/24 no shutdown (The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi.
PAGE 1022
Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1. DellEMC#1#sh run int po2 interface Port-channel 2 description port-channel_to_access_switch_A1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.
PAGE 1023
----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.10.10.2 Up default 1 3 34998 4 5 Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed.
PAGE 1024
Verify if peer routing has populated the CAM table with the correct information using the show cam mac command.
PAGE 1025
no ip address no shutdown The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/0-1 no shutdown Te 0/4 connects to the access switch A1.
PAGE 1026
tagged Port-channel 2 no shutdown The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backupdestination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer.
PAGE 1027
network 192.168.8.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.9.0/24 area 0 network 172.16.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.20.0/29 area 0 passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passive-interface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1.
PAGE 1028
! interface Loopback4 ip address 4.4.4.2 255.255.255.0 R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4.
PAGE 1029
This default route is configured for testing purposes, as described in the next section. The access switch (A1) is used to generate ICMP test PINGs to a loopback interface on CR1. This default route points to DellEMC#2’s VLAN 800 SVI interface. It’s in place to ensure that routed test traffic has DellEMC#2’s MAC address as the destination address in the Ethernet frame’s header When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other.
PAGE 1030
Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range gigabitethernet 1/16 - 1/17 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-gi-1/16-17)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-gi-1/16-17)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-gi-1/16-17)# no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2.
PAGE 1031
Domain_1_Peer4#no shutdown Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#vlt domain 200 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.18.130.12 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0b:00:0b:00:0b Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-routing Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 4.
PAGE 1032
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
PAGE 1033
HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 3 34998 1026 1025 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
PAGE 1034
VLT Role ---------VLT Role: System MAC address: System Role Priority: Local System MAC address: Local System Role Priority: Secondary 00:01:e8:8a:df:bc 32768 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 32768 The following example shows the show running-config vlt command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.
PAGE 1035
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 We are the root Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------- -------- - ------- ------------Po 1 128.2 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.2 Po 3 128.4 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.4 Po 4 128.
PAGE 1036
NUM Status Description Q Ports 10 Active U Po110(Te 1/51) T Po100(Te 1/49,50) Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link.
PAGE 1037
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative. Table 119. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
PAGE 1038
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take information, refer to the Release Notes for this release. VLT LAG ID is not configured on one VLT peer A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. Verify the VLT LAG ID is configured correctly on both VLT peers. VLT LAG ID mismatch The VLT port channel is brought down.
PAGE 1039
Keep the following points in mind when you configure VLT nodes in a PVLAN: • Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. • You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PAGE 1040
PVLAN Operations When One VLT Peer is Down When a VLT port moves to the Admin or Operationally Down state on only one of the VLT nodes, the VLT Lag is still considered to be up. All the PVLAN MAC entries that correspond to the operationally down VLT LAG are maintained as synchronized entries in the device. These MAC entries are removed when the peer VLT LAG also becomes inactive or a change in PVLAN configuration occurs.
PAGE 1041
Table 120.
PAGE 1042
VLT LAG Mode Peer1 PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN Peer2 ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuous Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
PAGE 1043
7 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8 (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down.
PAGE 1044
• Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes The proxy ARP functionality is supported on VLT peer nodes. A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for the other router in a VLT domain. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled.
PAGE 1045
When a VLT node detects peer up, it does not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if you enable peer routing on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
PAGE 1046
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2 Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3 Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4 Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
PAGE 1047
DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown DellEMC# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 50 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-sta
PAGE 1048
DellEMC(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown DellEMC# DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switc
PAGE 1049
IPv6 Peer Routing in VLT Domains Overview VLT enables the physical links between two devices that are called VLT nodes or peers, and within a VLT domain, to be considered as a single logical link to external devices that are connected using LAG bundles to both the VLT peers. This capability enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning tree protocol (STP), thereby providing a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization.
PAGE 1050
Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a Non-VLT Domain Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level. Routed VLT allows you to replace VRRP with routed VLT to route the traffic from Layer 2 access nodes. With ND synchronization, both the VLT nodes perform Layer 3 forwarding on behalf of each other. Synchronization of NDPM entries learned on non-VLT interfaces between the non-VLT nodes.
PAGE 1051
Figure 137. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
PAGE 1052
Figure 138. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL.
PAGE 1053
Consider a situation in which NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node1 on a non-VLT interface and NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node2 on a non-VLT interface. When VLT node1 receives NA on a VLT interface, it learns the Host MAC address on the received interface. This learned neighbor entry is synchronized to VLT node2 as it is learned on ICL.
PAGE 1054
Non-VLT host to Non-VLT host traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic over ICL interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL. Router Solicitation When VLT node receives router Solicitation on VLT interface/non-VLT interface it consumes the packets and will send RA back on the received interface. VLT node will drop the RS message if it is received over ICL interface.
PAGE 1055
ToR 1 Enable BFD globally. TOR(conf)# bfd enable 2 Configure a VLT peer LAG.
PAGE 1056
VLT Primary 1 Enable BFD globally. VLT_Primary(conf)# bfd enable 2 Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Primary(conf)# interface port-channel 100 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# channel-member gigabitethernet 1/1, 1/2 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown 3 Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain.
PAGE 1057
VLT_Primary(conf-if-gi-1/3)#port-channel 10 mode active VLT_Primary(conf-if-gi-1/3)#no shutdown VLT_Primary(conf)#interface port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#switchport VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown 5 Configure a VLAN VLT_Secondary(conf)#interface vlan 100 VLT_Secondary(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 100.1.1.
PAGE 1058
Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: 0 seconds Multicast peer-routing timeout: 150 seconds 1058 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT)
PAGE 1059
62 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1060
Figure 139. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. • You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
PAGE 1061
• You cannot change the VLT LAG to a legacy LAG when it is part of proxy-gateway. • You cannot change the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) port channel interface to a legacy LAG when you enable a proxy gateway. • Dell EMC Networking recommends the vlt-peer-mac transmit command only for square VLTs without diagonal links. • The virtual router redundancy (VRRP) protocol and IPv6 routing is not supported. • Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported.
PAGE 1062
• You must configure the interface proxy gateway LLDP to enable or disable a proxy-gateway LLDP TLV on specific interfaces. • The interface is typically a VLT port-channel that connects to a remote VLT domain. • The new proxy gateway TLV is carried on the physical links under the port channel only. • You must have at least one link connection to each unit of the VLT domain. Following are the prerequisites for Proxy Gateway LLDP configuration: • You must globally enable LLDP.
PAGE 1063
LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 140. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
PAGE 1064
• Any L3 packet, when it gets an L3 hit and is routed, it has a time to live (TTL) decrement as expected. • You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
PAGE 1065
Figure 141. VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT Domain Configuration Dell-1 and Dell-2 constitute VLT domain 120. Dell-3 and Dell-4 constitute VLT domain 110. These two VLT domains are connected using a VLT LAG P0 50. To know how to configure the interfaces in VLT domains, see the Configuring VLT section. Dell-1 VLT Configuration vlt domain 120 peer-link port-channel 120 back-up destination 10.1.1.
PAGE 1066
switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used. VLAN 100 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF Peering VLAN to Dell-2 ip address 10.10.100.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown VLAN 101 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between the two VLT domains.
PAGE 1067
The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.100.1 Vl 100 0 Dell-3 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
PAGE 1068
The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.2 Vl 102 0 Dell-4 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
PAGE 1069
63 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
PAGE 1070
Figure 142. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
PAGE 1071
If the next-hop IP in a static route VRF statement is VRRP IP of another VRF, this static route does not get installed on the VRRP master. VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the nondefault VRF. Table 121.
PAGE 1072
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance.
PAGE 1073
Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
PAGE 1074
Assigning an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance OSPF routes are supported on all VRF instances. See the Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2) chapter for complete OSPF configuration information. Assign an OSPF process to a VRF instance . Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPF process. The OSPF Process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process, and the Router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
PAGE 1075
Task Command Syntax Command Mode Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 43, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Configuring Management VRF You can assign a management interface to a management VRF. NOTE: The loopback interface cannot be added into the management VRF. 1 Create a management VRF. CONFIGURATION ip vrf management 2 Assign a management port to a management VRF.
PAGE 1076
CONFIGURATION management route ip-address mask managementethernet ormanagement route ipv6-address prefixlength managementethernet You can also have the management route to point to a front-end port in case of the management VRF. For example: management route 2::/64 gigabitethernet 1/1 . • Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery.
PAGE 1077
Figure 144. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.
PAGE 1078
ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.
PAGE 1079
ip address 2.0.0.2/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.2/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.
PAGE 1080
DellEMC#show ip route vrf orange Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.0.
PAGE 1081
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway ----------------C 1.0.0.0/24 Direct, Vl 128 O 10.0.0.0/24 via 1.0.0.1, Vl 128 C 11.0.0.
PAGE 1082
The following example illustrates how route leaking between two VRFs can be performed: interface GigabitEthernet 1/9 ip vrf forwarding VRF1 ip address 120.0.0.1/24 interface GigabitEthernet 1/10 ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.
PAGE 1083
ip vrf vrf-shared interface interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding vrf-shared ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-Shared is created and the interface 1/4 is assigned to this VRF. 2 Configure the export target in the source VRF:. ip route-export 1:1 3 Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF.
PAGE 1084
The show run output for the above configuration is as follows: ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ! ip vrf ip ip ip VRF-Red route-export route-import 2:2 1:1 VRF-Blue route-export route-import 3:3 1:1 VRF-Green VRF-shared route-export route-import route-import 1:1 2:2 3:3 Show routing tables of all the VRFs (without any route-export and route-import tags being configured) DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O 11.1.1.1/32 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.
PAGE 1085
DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Shared O 11.1.1.1/32 via VRF-Red:111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, VRF-Red:Gi 1/11 0/0 O 22.2.2.2/32 via VRF-Blue:122.2.2.2 110/0 C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, VRF-Blue:Gi 1/22 0/0 O 44.4.4.4/32 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 00:00:11 C 144.4.4.
PAGE 1086
interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 2 Define a route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol. DellEMC(config)route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol permit 10 3 Define the matching criteria for the exported routes.
PAGE 1087
The show VRF commands displays the following output: DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, Gi 1/22 0/0 O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 O 44.4.4.4/32 22:39:61 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP.
PAGE 1088
64 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
PAGE 1089
Figure 145. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
PAGE 1090
CAUTION: Increasing the advertisement interval increases the VRRP Master dead interval, resulting in an increased failover time for Master/Backup election. Take caution when increasing the advertisement interval, as the increased dead interval may cause packets to be dropped during that switch-over time. NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 123.
PAGE 1091
The VRID range is from 1 to 255. • NOTE: The interface must already have a primary IP address defined and be enabled, as shown in the second example. Delete a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. DellEMC(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration.
PAGE 1092
Example: Migrating an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3 NOTE: Carefully following this procedure, otherwise you might introduce dual master switches issues. To migrate an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3: 1 Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-gi-1/2-vrid-100)#version both 2 Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3.
PAGE 1093
Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.1 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.2 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.3 The following example shows how to verify a virtual IP address configuration. NOTE: In the following example, the primary IP address and the virtual IP addresses are on the same subnet.
PAGE 1094
• Configure the priority for the VRRP group. INTERFACE -VRID mode priority priority The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 100. Examples of the priority Command DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/2)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/2-vrid-111)#priority 125 To verify the VRRP group priority, use the show vrrp command. Dellshow vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
PAGE 1095
Examples of the authentication-type Command The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type ? DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type simple 7 force10 The following example shows verifying the VRRP authentication configuration using the show conf command. The bold section shows the encrypted password.
PAGE 1096
Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
PAGE 1097
Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell EMC Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost). If the tracked interface’s state goes up, the VRRP group’s priority increases by 10.
PAGE 1098
• (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show running-config interface interface Examples of Configuring and Viewing the track Command The following example shows how to configure tracking using the track command. DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#track gigabitethernet 1/2 The following example shows how to verify tracking using the show conf command.
PAGE 1099
The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface. DellEMC#show running-config interface gigabitethernet 1/8 interface GigabitEthernet 1/8 no ip address ipv6 address 2007::30/64 vrrp-ipv6-group 1 track 2 priority-cost 20 track 3 priority-cost 30 virtual-address 2007::1 virtual-address fe80::1 no shutdown Setting VRRP Initialization Delay When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot.
PAGE 1100
Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
PAGE 1101
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
PAGE 1102
Figure 147. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
PAGE 1103
R2(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 R2(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address 1::10 R2(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-10)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c
PAGE 1104
VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN. The following example shows a typical use case in which you create three virtualized overlay networks by configuring three VRFs in two switches. The default gateway to reach the Internet in each VRF is a static route with the next hop being the virtual IP address configured in VRRP. In this scenario, a single VLAN is associated with each VRF.
PAGE 1105
S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177. S1(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-101)#priority 100 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.2 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 S1(conf-if-gi-1/2)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-2 S1(conf-if-gi-1/2)#ip address 10.10.1.
PAGE 1106
! S2(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 1/3 S2(conf-if-gi-1/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S2(conf-if-gi-1/3)#ip address 20.1.1.6/24 S2(conf-if-gi-1/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S2(conf-if-gi-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 100 S2(conf-if-gi-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
PAGE 1107
DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf1 vlan 400 -----------------Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 278, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.
PAGE 1108
S2(conf-if-vl-300)#no shutdown DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf1 vlan 400 -----------------Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 278, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 10, Version: 2, Net: 20.1.1.
PAGE 1109
Figure 149. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. Be sure you make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
PAGE 1110
NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
PAGE 1111
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 DellEMC#show vrrp gigabitethernet 2/8 GigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 120 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80:
PAGE 1112
Proxy Gateway with VRRP VLT proxy gateway solves the inefficient traffic trombone problem when VLANs are extended between date centers and when VMs are migrated between the two DCs. Starting from Dell EMC Networking OS 9.14.0.0, VRRP provides a much simpler method to solve the traffic trombone problem. This is achieved by configuring same VRRP group IDs to the extended L3 VLANs and VRRP stays active-active across all four VLT nodes even though they are in two different VLT domains.
PAGE 1113
• The core routers C1 and D1 in local VLT Domain along with C2 and D2 in the remote VLT Domain are part of a Layer 3 cloud. • The core routers C1, D1, C2, D2 are in a VRRP group with the same vrrp-group ID. When a virtual machine running in Server Rack 1 migrates to Server Rack 2, L3 packets for that VM are routed through the default gateway. The following examples show sample configurations of the core routers.
PAGE 1114
back-up destination 10.16.140.5 system-mac mac-address 00:00:aa:00:00:00 unit-id 1 peer-routing interface port-channel 128 channel member ten 1/1/1 channel member ten 1/1/2 no shutdown int ten 1/5/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 10 mode active no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.
PAGE 1115
no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.3/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.
PAGE 1116
no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.4/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.
PAGE 1117
65 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
PAGE 1118
EXEC Privilege mode show system brief 3 Start diagnostics on the unit. diag stack-unit stack-unit-number When the tests are complete, the system displays the following message and automatically reboots the unit. DellEMC#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-0.txt Diags completed...
PAGE 1119
Hardware Watchdog Timer The hardware watchdog command automatically reboots an Dell EMC Networking OS switch/router with a single RPM that is unresponsive. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual power cycle. Using the Show Hardware Commands The show hardware command tree consists of commands used with the system. These commands display information from a hardware sub-component and from hardware-based feature tables.
PAGE 1120
EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack-unit {1–12} unit {0-0} port-stats [detail] • View the stack-unit internal registers for each port-pipe. EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack-unit {1–12} unit {0-0} register • View the tables from the bShell through the CLI without going into the bShell.
PAGE 1121
When the system detects a genuine over-temperature condition, it powers off the card. To recognize this condition, look for the following system messages: CHMGR-2-MAJOR_TEMP: Major alarm: chassis temperature high (temperature reaches or exceeds threshold of [value]C) CHMGR-2-TEMP_SHUTDOWN_WARN: WARNING! temperature is [value]C; approaching shutdown threshold of [value]C To view the programmed alarm thresholds levels, including the shutdown value, use the show alarms threshold command.
PAGE 1122
Table 125. SNMP Traps and OIDs OID String OID Name Description chSysPortXfpRecvPower OID displays the receiving power of the connected optics. chSysPortXfpTxPower OID displays the transmitting power of the connected optics. chSysPortXfpRecvTemp OID displays the temperature of the connected optics. Receiving Power .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.6 Transmitting power .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.8 Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.
PAGE 1123
• • • clear hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number unit 0-1 counters clear hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number cpu data-plane statistics clear hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number cpu party-bus statistics Displaying Drop Counters To display drop counters, use the following commands. • • Identify which stack unit and port pipe is experiencing internal drops. show hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number drops [unit unit-number] Identify which interface is experiencing internal drops.
PAGE 1124
TX Err PKT Counter --- Error counters--Internal Mac Transmit Errors Unknown Opcodes Internal Mac Receive Errors : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 DellEMC#show hardware stack-unit 1 drops UNIT No: 1 Total Total Total Total Total Ingress Drops IngMac Drops Mmu Drops EgMac Drops Egress Drops : : : : : 6804353 0 124904297 0 0 DellEMC#show hardware stack-unit 1 drops unit 0 UserPort PortNumber Egress Drops 1 1 0 0 2 2 0 0 3 3 0 0 4 4 0 0 5 5 0 0 6 6 0 0 7 7 0 0 8 8 0 0 9 9 0 0 10 10 0 0 11 11 0 0 12 12 0 0 13 13 0 0 14 14 0
PAGE 1125
26 0 43 0 0 0 44 0 0 0 45 0 0 0 46 0 0 0 47 0 0 0 48 0 0 0 49 0 0 0 50 0 0 0 51 0 0 0 52 0 0 0 61 0 0 0 62 0 0 0 63 0 0 0 64 0 0 0 65 0 0 0 66 0 0 0 67 0 0 0 68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 42 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 35 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 0
PAGE 1126
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 54/1 54/2 54/3 54/4 Internal Internal 69 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 71 0 0 0 72 0 0 0 53 0 0 0 57 4659499 0 0 Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU. The show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics command displays input and output statistics on the party bus, which carries inter-process communication traffic between CPUs.
PAGE 1127
txPkt(COS8 ) txPkt(COS9 ) txPkt(COS10) txPkt(COS11) txPkt(UNIT0) :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Example of Viewing Party Bus Statistics DellEMC#sh hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 27550 packets, 2559298 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
PAGE 1128
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Counter Multicast Packet Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control frame counter PAUSE frame counter Oversized frame counter Jabber frame counter VLAN tag frame counter Double VLAN tag frame counter RUNT frame counter Fragment counter VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 By
PAGE 1129
RX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter RX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter RX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter RX - Good Packet Counter RX - Packet/Frame Counter RX - Unicast Frame Counter RX - Multicast Frame Counter RX - Broadcast Frame Counter RX - Byte Counter RX - Control Frame Counter RX - Pause Control Frame Counter RX - Oversized Frame Counter RX - Jabber Frame Counter RX - VLAN Tag Frame Counter RX - Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RX - RUNT Frame Counter RX - Fragment Counter RX - VLAN Tagged Packet
PAGE 1130
The panic string contains key information regarding the crash. Several panic string types exist, and they are displayed in regular English text to enable easier understanding of the crash cause. Example of Application Mini Core Dump Listings DellEMC#dir flash:/CORE_DUMP_DIR Directory of flash:/CORE_DUMP_DIR 1 2 3 4 drwx drwx drwx -rwx 4096 4096 4096 512 Jan Jan Jan May 07 01 07 11 2015 1980 2015 2015 13:25:04 00:00:00 13:25:04 20:54:24 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 . .. FTP_STK_MEMBER f10StkUnit.
PAGE 1131
66 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
PAGE 1132
Force10 PVST+ SFF-8431 SFP+ Direct Attach Cable (10GSFP+Cu) MTU 12,000 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 126.
PAGE 1133
R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 24 Definition of 7.7.1 74 the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 26 PPP over 15 SONET/SDH 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 26 A Two Rate 9 Three Color 8 Marker 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.
PAGE 1134
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 127. General IPv4 Protocols RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 791 Internet Protocol 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution 7.6.1 Protocol 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
PAGE 1135
General IPv6 Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general IPv6 protocols. Table 128. General IPv6 Protocols RFC # Full Name S-Series 1886 DNS Extensions to support IP 7.8.1 version 6 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1981 Path MTU Discovery for IP (Part version 6 ial) 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
PAGE 1136
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for BGP protocols. Table 129. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) RFC# Full Name S-Series/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1997 BGP ComAmtturnibituitees 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2385 Protection of BGP Sessions via the TCP MD5 Signature Option 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2439 BGP Route Flap Damping 7.8.
PAGE 1137
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for OSPF protocol. Table 130. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) RFC # Full Name S-Series/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1587 The OSPF Not-SoStubby Area (NSSA) Option 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2154 OSPF with Digital Signatures 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2370 The OSPF Opaque LSA Option 7.6.1 9.8(0.
PAGE 1138
RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 3784 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) Extensions in Support of Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 5120 MT-ISIS: Multi Topology (MT) 9.8(0.0P2) Routing in Intermediate System to Intermediate Systems (ISISs) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 5306 Restart Signaling for IS-IS 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
PAGE 1139
Multicast The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 133. Multicast RFC# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
PAGE 1140
67 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • Introduction to X.509v3 certificates • X.509v3 support in • Information about installing CA certificates • Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) • Information about installing trusted certificates • Transport layer security (TLS) • Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) • Verifying certificates • Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.
PAGE 1141
1 An entity or organization that wants a digital certificate requests one through a CSR. 2 To request a digital certificate through a CSR, a key pair is generated and the CSR is signed using the secret private key. The CSR contains information identifying the applicant and the applicant's public key. This public key is used to verify the signature of the CSR and the Distinguished Name (DN). 3 This CSR is sent to a Certificate Authority (CA).
PAGE 1142
The Root CA generates a private key and a self-signed CA certificate. The Intermediate CA generates a private key and a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Using its private key, the root CA signs the intermediate CA’s CSR generating a CA certificate for the Intermediate CA. This intermediate CA can then sign certificates for hosts in the network and also for further intermediate CAs.
PAGE 1143
During the initial TLS protocol negotiation, both participating parties also check to see if the other’s certificate is revoked by the CA. To do this check, the devices query the CA’s designated OCSP responder on the network. The OCSP responder information is included in the presented certificate, the Intermediate CA inserts the info upon signing it, or it may be statically configured on the host. Information about installing CA certificates Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to download and install X.
PAGE 1144
If you do not specify the cert-file option, the system prompts you to enter metadata information related to the CSR as follows: You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request. What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN. There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank. For some fields there will be a default value; if you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
PAGE 1145
NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS. This trusted certificate is also presented to the TLS server implementations that require client authentication such as Syslog.
PAGE 1146
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic. However, the maximum time allowed for a TLS session to resume without repeating the TLS authentication or handshake process is configurable with a default of 1 hour.
PAGE 1147
NOTE: If you have an IPv6 address in the URL, then enclose this address in square brackets. For example, http:// [1100::203]:6514. Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional.
PAGE 1148
Verifying Server certificates Verifying server certificates is mandatory in the TLS protocol. As a result, all TLS-enabled applications require certificate verification, including Syslog servers. The system checks the Server certificates against installed CA certificates. NOTE: As part of the certificate verification, the hostname or IP address of the server is verified against the hostname or IP address specified in the application.